Students Marathi Grammar
393
Transcript of Students Marathi Grammar
STUDENT S MARATHi GRAMMAR .
BY T H E
R EV. GA NPA T R AO R . NA VA LKAN,
FEL LOW OF T H E BOM BAY UN IVER S IT Y .
Though i t would be a m i stake to attempt i n our e lementary sohooh to
replace an emp iri cal by a scienti fic knowledge of Grammar, that empirical
knowledge of Grammar ought i n time to be rai sed to a real . rat ional , and
satisfying knowledge .—a knowledge not only of facts , but of reasons ; a
knowledge that teaches us not only what Grammar is, but how i t came to be
what i t i s.— M awM u ller.
T H I RD EDITION (R EVI SED A ND EN L A R GED) .
B ombayP R IN T ED A T T H E
EDUCA T ION SOCIETY’
S PRESS, BYCULLA"
1294a
(A l l ri ghts reserved . )
PREFACE T0 THE SECOND EDIT ION .
Tms is a new and enlarged edi tion of the STUDEN 'r’
s
M A N UAL or M A RA'
rai GR AM M A R , designed equally for beg inners and advanced students. The former are advi sed to pass
over the Notes, printed in small type, as well as the port ions in
the text which are specified as useful at an advanced stage of
study . I have g iven cOpious explanations, not seldom ventur
ing to cfler a rationale of the facts or forms di scussed, as in
telligent students, in these days, are expected to know more
than what i s merely elementary and practical. I have also
endeavoured to determ ine the exact form and sense of every
g rammati cal word and inflection ; and the value of definite
Opinions on these points can be truly estimated only by those
who are acquaintedwi th the present painful state of uncertaintyand doubt that generally prevails. I have, moreover, attempt
ed to simpli fy and systematise several difli cult departments of
M arathi grammar. I would specially ci te, by way of example ,
th e Declension of Nouns. The number of the Declensions has
been reduced from six or seven to three, i f not absolutely to
one,whi le a most simple method of derivi ng the crude-form
hasbeen suggested. By the aid of two pronominal letters anyM arathi noun could he decli ned wi th absolute certainty . For
th is and other important changes in my book, I am indebted
chiefly to the Comm/rati os Grammar of Boer. a work which i s
not more valuable for what i t explicitly teaches than for what
i t obscurely suggests. It is by a study of this wonderfulwork
that I have been led to look for something deeper, truer, and
more Spiritual in Words than what thei r external form reveals,
and i t i s under i ts guidance that, I believe, I have attained,though but imperfectly, to the hidden life of some of the
M arathi words and inflections . Indeed, there is nothi ng arbi
trary and conventional in language :every form of it i s instinct
with life and reason . Panini may be said to have g iven i t a
PREFA CE.
body of perfect beauty and symmetr but Bopp has the honour
of having communicated to it the breath of life!
The sections on the Inherent at , the A ccent, the Compound
Verbs, &c. ,may be regarded as qui te new and original, whi le
the chapters on Etymology, though they cannot claim much
orig inali ty, wi ll not fai l to prove interesting . They have been
written chiefly with the aid of Dr. M um’s Sanskri t Texts ,
Professor CownL’s Prékri t Prakésa, and M r. Emma
’s Oom
parati ve Grammar of the Indo-A ryan Vemaculars . Very valu
able i nformation on the M arathi idioms has been derived from
the works of M OLESWORT H , CANDY and ST EVEN SON .
Besides the works cited above, I have profitably consulted
many others, among which I would menti on wi th prominence
the miscellaneous wri tings of Profs . M A X M ii LLER andWH ITNEY,
presenting ,as they do, the results of the modern ph i lological
investigations, in a simple and attracti ve form,lit up with
original observations of great beauty and force, as well as the
M arathi Grammars of my personal friends, M essrs .
DADOBA and GODBOLE, together with the H indi and Urdu
Grammars of the R ev. W . ET H ER INGTON and Prof. DOWSON .
I pray that the Divine blessing may rest upon thi s humble
effort to benefi t students .
PREFACE TO THE TH IRD EDIT ION .
Some portions of this book have been re-wri tten anda great
deal of new matter has been added, which, I trust, will enhance
i ts uti lity and importance .
3“ Every form of declension and conjugation, every geni tive, and everyso-called infinitive and gerund is the result of a long succession of effortsand of i ntelligent efforts . T here i s nothi ng accidental, nothing irregu lar,nothing without a purpose and meaning in any part of Greek or Latin
grammar. No one who has once discovered this h idden life of language, noone who has once found out that what seemed to be merely anomalous andwhimsical in language is but, as i t were, a petri facti on of thought, of deep,curious, poetical, phi losophi cal thought, wull ever rest a sin ti ll he hasdescended as far ashe can descend into the ancient shafts of uman speech,exploring level after level, and test ing every successi ve foundation which
supports the surface of each Spoken language— M awM uller .
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PA R T I .
Orthography . PAGE
C H A PTER I . — Letters thei r Forms and Sounds, l 1 4 1
C H A PTER I I .
— The Nature of the Letters 9
1 . The Vowels, 15 20 9
2. The Consonants, 21 28 1 2
[IL— The Powers of the Letters 1 5
l . Syllabiflcati on , § 29 32 .
2. Syllabic Pronunciati on, 3 3 39
(1 ) The Inherent at ,
(2) The A nusvara, 38
(3 ) The A ccent, 3 9
3 . R ules on Spelling , 40
Etymology .
C H A PT ER IV.—The Classificati on and Infla ti on of Words
General Observati ons, 4 ] 53
Gender, § 4 8 5]
Number, 52 53
C H A PT ER V .— The Substantive
The Divi sion of Substantives, § 542. The Gender of Substantives, 60 69
.(l ) The Determinati on of the Gender bythe form of the Substantives, 6 1
(2) By the Signification of the Substan
ti y es, § 62 63
(3 ) The Derivati on of the Gender Forms,
64 69 .
C H A PT R R VI .-Numbers of Substantives, 70 7l
C H A PT ER VII .-Cases of Substantives
The Enumeration of the Cases, 72 83 .
Tableof the Case-T erminations, {s 84 85 .
CONTENT S .
CH A PTER VIII .— Deelensrbn of Substantives
Declensions enumerated and explained,
87 100
CH A PTER IX.— Declensiom-continued.
The fi rst Declension, 101
The Second Declension, 104 107
The ThirdDeclension, 108 1 1 1
CH A PTER X .—The A djecti veThe A djective of Quality, 1 12 1 18
The A djective of Number, 1 19 1 4 9
1 . T he Cardinal Numerals, 120 1 3 a
2. The Ordinal Numerals, 1 3 6 1 3 8
3 . The M ultiplicatives, 1 39 1 40
4 . T he Fractionals, 14 1 1 4 7
5 . The Di stributives, 1 4 8
6 . The Indefinites, § 14 9
CH APTER XI .— The Pronouns
Enumeration of the Pronouns,150 1 52.
1 . The Personal Pronouns, l 53
2. The Indefini te Personal Pronoun ,
1 59
3 . The R elative Proiiouns, 1 62 1 65
4 . The Demonstrative Pronouns, 1 66
1 72
5 . T he Interrogative Pronouns, 1 73
1 76
6 . The Indefini te Pronouns, 1 77
CH A PTER XI I .—The Verbs
The C lassification of the Verb, 1 78 187 .
CH A PT ER XIII .— The Infi ecti on of Verbs
General Observations, 1 88 1 92
1 . The Tenses, 1 93 199
2. The M oods, 200 205
3 . The Prayogas , § 206 21 2
4 . The Participles and the Verbal Nouns21 3 21 5
PAGE
CONT ENTS . vi i
PAGE
C H APT ER X lV. Conjugation
C lassification Of the Conjugations and Para
di gms, § 21 7 222
C H A P TER XV .-C'onjugati on— continued.
1 . Causal Verbs, § 223 23 2
2. Potential Verbs, 23 3 238
3 . A nomalous Verbs, 239
4 . Irregular Verbs, 24 1 24 2
C H A P TER XVI. — The A uxi li ary Verbs
General Observations, 24 3 25 1
1 . The Substantive Verbs, 252
2. The Verb ai , 256
3 . Negative Forms, 257
C H A PT ER XVII .— A uzi li ary Verbs
* continued .
The M odal Verbs, 258 285
1 . The VerbW A 259 266
2. The Verbwas}, 267 269
6 . The Verb arrfi , § 27o 276
4 . T he Verbm a274 278
5 . The Verb T i , 279 286
C H A PTER XVII .-Oompound Verbs
General Observations,
287 291
The Nominals, 292 300
The Verbal Compounds, 30]
1 . The Potentials, 3 02
2. The Passives, § 303 305
3 . The Intens ives, § 306 307
4 The Continuatives and Frequentives,308
T he Desideratives, 309
The Inceptives, § 3 10
The Permiss ives, 3 1 1
The Obligationals, 3 1 2oo
qos
gu
vi i i CONT ENT S .
PAGE
CHA PTER XVII — The Compound Tenses
General Observations, 3 1 3 3 1 8
The Indicative M ood, 3 18 3 21
The Condi tional M ood, 322 3 25
The Subjunctive M ood, 326 3 29
The Participles, 330
C H A PTER XVIII .— Paradigmas of Verbs
The Paradigm, 3“
3 32
First ConjugationSecond Conjugation
CH A PTER XIX — The Parti cles
The A dverb,
3 3 5 3 4 8
The Postposi tion , 3 4 9 3 55
The Conjunction, 356 3 57
The Interjection, 3 58 3 60
PA R T II .
C HA PTER XX.— T he Origin and Gol l tposi /iou of
General Observations, 3 6 1 3 67 208
I .— The Changes of Sansk ri t Words
1 . The Vowel Changes, 3 68 3 6 9 21 1
2 . Simple Consonant-Changes, 3 70 212
3 . The Compound Consonant Changes,
3 71 3 77 21 3
IL— Inflectional Changes, 3 73 21 5
II I .~ —The Desaj Words, 3 74 21 6
IV .—TheChanges of P rakri tWords
, 3 75
V .— Classification of the elements which
comprise M arathi , § 3 78 21 9
VL— The M arathi R oots, 3 80— 3 81 221
CH APTER XXL— The Pri nciples of M arathi Derivati on
General Observations, 3 82 3 84
I .-Primary Derivatives
1 . The Causal Verb, 3 86— 3 98 228
2. The Potential Verb, 399— 4 01 23 1
PA GE
II . Secondary Derivatives
Prefixes, 403 405
Suflixes, § 406 4 14
III .—The R eduplicatives, 4 1 5 4 3 1
C H APTER XXII — P rincip les of Derivation— continued.
IV .— Compounds
General Observations, 4 3 2 4 3 6
1 . Substantive Compounds, 4 3 7
(1 ) Determinative Compounds, 4 3 8 4 40
(2) Copulative Compounds , 4 4 1
2. A djective Compounds, 4 4 3 4 4 6
3 . A dverbial Compounds, 4 4 7 44 8
II .— Obscure Compounds, 4 49 4 50
III .— A pparent Compounds, § 4 51
C H A P TER XXIII — The P ermutation of Letters (at? )General Observations, 4 52 4 53
1 . The Combination ofVowels, 4 54 4 55 .
2. The Combination of Consonants, § 4 564 60 s o .
3 . The A nusvara, 4 6 1
4 . The Vi sarga, § 4 62
PA R T II I .
C H A P T ER XXIV — R ules of Concordance
1 . The arrangement Of words into Sentences,
§ 4 63 51 ]
2. The varieties Of the Subject, 4 77 4 7 9
3 . The Case of the Subject, 4 80 48 1
4 . The R elation of the Nomi native to the
Verb, 4 82 4 85
5 . Two or more Nominatives, 4 86
6 . The Object, 4 87
7 . Two Objects, 4 95 508
8. The Object being a Sentence, 509 51 1 .
X CONTENTS.
CH A PTER XXV — The A ttri bute
The A djective, 51 2 530
1 . R ules on Concordance, 5 1 6
2. R ules on Compari son,
3 . A pposi tion, 53 1
CH A PTER XXVI .— Pronouns
1 . Personal Pronouns, 532 53 7
2. The Indefini te Personal Pronoun,
54 8
3 . R elative Pronouns, 54 9 556
4 . Demonstrative Pronouns, 557 570
5 . Interrogative Pronouns, 57 1 577°
6 . Indefini te Pronouns, 578 582
CH APT ER XXVII .— The Uses of the Cases
1 . The Nominative Case, 583
2. The A ccusative Case, 584 585
3 . The Instrumental Case, 586
4 . The Dative Case, 588
5 . T he A blative Case, 589
6 . The Gen i tive Case, 590 592
7 . The Locative Case, 593
CH A PT ER XXVIII .-Postposi ti ons governing the Cases
1 . The Instrumental Case, 596
2. The Dative Case, 597
3 . The A blative Case,598
4 . The Locative Case, 599
C H A PTER XXIX . Uses of the T enses
The Indicative M ood
1 . The Present Tense, 602 607
2 . The Past Tense, 608 6 1 5
3 . The Future T ense, 61 6 621
The Conditional M ood, 622 628
The Subjunctive M ood, 629 63 1
The Imperative M ood, 63 2 63 3
The Infini tive M ood, 63 4 63 8
PAGE.
xi
The Participles, 639 64 2
The Gerund, 64 3
The Supines, 64 4
CH A PT ER XXX. The Parti cles
The A dverb, 65 1— 656 35 1
The Postposi tion, 657 659
The Conjunction,660 6 76 . 35 3
1 . The Copulative Sentences, 660 662. 3 532. The Disjunctive Sentences, 35 5
3 . The A dversative Sentences, 664 666 . 3 55
4 . The Causative Sentences, 66 7 668. 3 57
5 . The Condi tional Sentences, 669 3 57
The Interjection, 6 78 682 3 60
PA R T IV .
Prosody .
CH A PTER XXXI . fi lm P rincip les of Versification, 683
$ 694
CHAPTE R XXX II . The Varieti es of M arathi Versification
CHAPTER XXXII I . — The Peculiar Poetical Forms, 707
§ 7 l8
A PPENDIX .
Note (A ) . -The M odi Characters
Note (B) .— Parsz°
ng
STUDENT S MARATHI'
GRAMMAR .
CHAPT ER I .
Orthography . m .
LETTERS : TH EIR FORM S A ND SOUNDS .
1 1 4 .
1 . T H E M arathi alphabet, as popularly given, consists of
fi fty-two letters, only fifty of which represent di stinct original
sounds.
2. The letters are methodically enumerated in the alphabet,
the Vowels ( a t being g iven first, and next the Conso
nants rdsfi
TH E VOWELS .
sfi o, afi au, si mmer: ah.
Note.— The sounds represented by at am. and a: ah are consonants,
but are given along with the vowels as they are always used with
them. Sect. 9.
T HE CONSONA NT S'
.
a:ha, (a kha, fl ga, H gha, 3’ vi a, Hraka, 3
“
chha, a ja, {I jha,3 1 na, a
'
ta};a tha, e da, a fi l m, orno, a ta, 7: tha, erda, u dha,(7 pa, cl.
“
pha , at ba, 3; bha , HH ana, a ya, r ta,a la, 27 am,
i f M , W sha, tr sa , g ha ,as la, at ksha, g dnya
Nessa—QT hel mand a dnya are compound consonants and do not
represent original simple sounds but they are assigned a place in the
alphabet only as they are represented by peculiar forms .
1 m
8] FORM S AND SOUNDS OP THE LETTER S .
TH E SEM I-VOCALS .
(1 ) Partially Open ,or Liquids — H ya, 1: ra, a la , H ca.
Nata — T hese semi-vocals are called~3 iazm ( or those holding a
m iddle place ) by the Sanskri t Grammarians as they stand between
the M utes and the Partially C losed consonants. They are, also,
denominated Liquids, as they have a smooth and flowing sound, and
easi ly unite with the other letters.
(2 ) Parti ally Closed, or Sibi lants .— n éa , H sha , fl ea, g ha .
Nola — These are called 3 3 3 or sibi lantS— heing uttered wi th a
h i ssing sound.
7 . The mutes are further arranged in the alphabet into
fi ve classes according to the organs or parts of the month
which affect thei r utterance . Tho organs or parts Of the
m outh R ITE? are five, and they are the throat, thepalate, the
roof of the palate, the teeth and the lips. We g ive below the
fi ve organic classes Of the M utes :
1 . Gutturals or Eff“ ! throat sounds Eh' ha, (H Icha
,
trga, H gha, gr ha .
2. Palatals or amen (palate sounds ) : 21 aka, 3“
chha ,
STj a, fi jha, i t na .
3 . Linguals or T i a-“
H (top-palate sounds ) a ta , 3
tha, 3 (la, a dha, H gta .
4 . Dentals or Ha t (teeth sounds) : H ta , 2!tha , H (la,
H dha, H na .
5. Labi als Shaw ( lip sounds ) trpa, q.‘ pha, H ha , H
bha, H ma .
8 . In each of the above five classes of the mutes the letters
are distinguished as Sara’s Sonants (HTHHH) , A spirates
(m m) , Non-asp irates (W ) , and NasalsW . The
fi rst two letters are surds, and the last three sonants. The
fi rst surd and the fi rst sonant are unaspirated ; the second surd
and the second sonant are aspi rated ; and the last sonant i s a
nasal . Thus
4 FORM S AND SOUNDS OR T HE LET TER S . 9
M utes (In?
Sonant .
Unaspi rate . A spi rate . Unaspi rata l A spirate. Nasal.
Note.—In pronouncing the surds SI
'
HIH voiceless the breath is
simply used, but not the voice, but in uttering the sonants H'
i'
HHqvoiced the voice is used. The aspirates W strong
breaths are pronounced wi th an audible breath as h. The nasals
erg-1m co-nasal or nasalised ) are uttered through both the nose
and the mouth simultaneously . The unaspi rated letters are W
weak breaths
9 . Of the letters of the alphabet which are not included in
the above detai ls Of classi fication are the Si , an, as. Q?and i t .
(a) The dot over Si i s called the A uusvrir, and i t marks a
purely nasal sound uttered exclusively through the nose li ke
the u in the French word bou, unmodified by the organs of themouth. It is put on a vowel, and uttered after i t . T he purely
nasal sound of the A nusvar i s called m or nasal, and
the modified nasal sound i s called 3 11m (Sect. 8
(b) The two dots by the S ide of at : are called the Vi sarga ,
and they are put by the S ide of a vowel to express a strong
aspirate. The Visarga is said to be produced entirely in the
chest, unmodified by the organs of the mouth. It belongs to
the class of the si bi lants .
(c) The 68 la, i s a modification of H la, and does not occur
in Sanskri t, except in some passages of the Vedas, where it is
used for H da . It belongs to the class of the linguals .
1 5] NA TURE or rns LETTERS . 9
(8 l The letter (I éa i s a palatal, and belongs to the class of
i t cha, g ala/1a, &c. sr sha, a lingual, belonging to the class of
g'
.
ta , ari m, &c. ; and a sa a dental, agreeing wi th the class of
a ta, u tka
,&c. The full sound of each of these sibi lants could
be mastered by attempting to utter them along with the class
of letters to which they belong ; thus,
a aka, 3 chhafi rja, qj ha, n éa .
a ta, 8 M a, a dd . 8 d/za,q ska,
a ta,
’4'
tha, Q
’ da,2: dlzafi sr sa .
(9) The letter as la,which belongs to the class of the
linguals , has no corresponding sound in English . It never
beg ins a word in M arathi and is usually substituted for the 8
la of Sanskri t words . In Canarese and the other Dravidian
languages , it i s freely interchanged with Q (la and tr gi a.
(10) The at [calmand a dnya are notwri tten as other com
pound consonants are, but have each a peculiar form, on
which account they are assi gned a place in the A lphabet, and
g iven in the dictionaries as independent letters . The QT i s
composed of a.“
l a andqska, and may be wri tten as agarkslza,
and also pronounced as such ;but a dug/a, wh ich is composed of
s l'
j a and at ri a,may be written as a , but not pronounced
as such in M arathi , though it assumes the sound in Sanskrit .
I n M arathi it i s pronounced as dnya, as i f i t was composed
of Q da na and a ya . In Gujarati it has the sound of
gnya, and in H indi of gya as am , j i i anobé— M . Dnydnoba
G . Gnyénoba, and H . Gyénobd.
CHA PTER II .
On the Nature of the Letters;
1 . T HE VOWELS .
s1 5 28.
1 5 . The vowels are simple sounds, which can be uttered
by themselves wi thout the aid of other letters. They are in
all fourteen in number .
2m
POWERS or ran LETTERS . 32
a.ta, ET .
té. fe .
ti , a .
ti . 5 .tu
, am,“
a é.tai . fr .
to. a .
tau
Note.-The vowelsw, g
'
z'
‘E 1 5, a: ti , andm If, assume these modified forms respectively
E, aw
Nata— The following is an example ofa: be in combination with
i t, i t. it and a:
a; kri , kri , g H i , i klz’
.
Note — {l é is Optionally changed to “ t combination with the
vowels ; as g; or 3 i n .
3 2. The Marathis denomi nate the tables of syllabification
arm 3 67576710431“ W W twelve-lettered” rows) ,and to make up the number twelve i n each row,
” the Anus
vlim and the Vi sarga. are added as i f; 1mm and at: leak 3”
tom
and a: tah. H ere i s a Bérékhadz’
wi th i ts complete number
of twelve syllables
V 9a.m yé. firgi , fi t at 1!en. 1 fr 98 . i t get H“
?90. tfi
yaw, i f 9am,11 0. gah.
SYLLA BIC PR ONUNCIAT ION .
3 3 . The letters or syllables which compose a M arathi
word are not all pronounced in a uni form way. Some arefullysounded, some imperfectly, and some othersforci bly.
1 . A syllable, composed of at a, may, or may not, be fully
sounded ; 1711 11 8, 6566? a flock lea-lap the last letter tris
imperfectly uttered, mak ing as i t were a dissyllabic word,
whi le a; and as are fully sounded.
2. When a syllable i s nasali sed, or is followed by a Visarga,or by a comloouml letter, i t i s forcibly pronounced, or, in other
words, accented: as sin a body d ing : fi‘rzaflt contempt
dhi h-ktir ;ql ' firm ghatt.
§ 3 4 . H ence the laws of M arathi syllabic pronunciation
apply to— (l ) the Inherent at , (2) the Anusvara, (3 ) theVisarga, and (4 ) the Compound letters.
Obs — M ost of these laws of syllabic pronunciation have been
announced for the first time, but they are most useful, and apply to
rowans or TH E Ls'rrsas. 3 6 »
Nots.-These rules, so important in reference to Mari thi and the
other Indian vernaculars, do not apply to Sanskrit, in which every
letter i s fully uttered unless a virdma be subscribed at the foot of i t ;
as i t a god: Sk. de-va (but in M arathiz de-v
Obo.-In the Dalthan, every inherent 31 is fully sounded, and even
the educated classet , unless they have long resided in Poona and its
vicinity, are prone to do the same thus, M , a coverletz yod-gli
(but in the Dakhan— go-da-di
(2) The A nusvcira.
3 6 . The A nusvara, in regard to its pronunciation , has
other peculiari tiesbesides those of the accent, andwe shall treat
of the former, before we consider the latter characteristics .
3 7,The A nusvara i s a convenient sign for the nasal
sounds in the language, which are of four kinds. T hey are the
Organi c, the N (i si l 'ya, the Provincial, and the Classi cal .
1 . When the A nusvzi ra is pronounced like any of the nasals
gr,q,
or, a, and tr, representing the five organs of speech
i t i s said to have an Organi sound are the throat= m[can
‘t/t stat a. figure at!mi l
e
.
2. When the Anusvara i s simply pronounced through the
nose, without g iving i t any organic sound, as in the French
word bon, it i s said to be a Nési leya m or a pure nasal.
This is the orig inal and principal sound of the A nusvara, and
may be optionally represented by thi s mark as si ' s sh dads,barley .
Note — The Nas ikya i s usually omitted in the Dakhan, and when
i t i s considered necessary to pronounce i t distinctly, chiefly in
honorific forms, i t is changed, even by the higher classes, to the
dental a“
; taint tyii’la to them
,erroneously tam tga-n-lci .
3 . When the A nusvhra assumes the sound of no, aM aréthi
substi tution for the Sanskrit 11 , it i s said to be provincial as
am protection, is sanvraksharta.
4 . When the A nusvéra,as in purely Sanskritwords,doubles
the letter which follows it, assuming, at the same time, a wea
kened nasalised sound, i t i s said to be classical as d'i l‘lrjunction wh i m sagyoga .
cu sslrloarzon or Wonns . 3 9
a’
m protection sanvraltshana .
m a doubt sagesaya.
{fart the world sanrséra .
fli rt massacre sane Inf
ra
(2) The A nusvg‘
ira followed by at ya, 8 la, a!"
va , tak e
the classical sound. i .s. , i t doubles the letters, a , a , and er,
giving them a slig htly nasali sed sound 30 4 )H eft" junction waiter sayyoga.
W connection {fin-sr sallagna .
m conversation «i n; savvada.
Note. Besides the five nasal letters, there are sti ll three nasalisedletters, the q, a:and q, or i; 53 and i , y, l, n, which are used to
represent a final am, i f followed by an intinl ( ma h l ‘v. and
modified by the pronunciation of these three semi-vowels. — M'
aw
M t'
i ller.
Notc. T he calv consonants which have no corresponding nasals
we 1;r , a s.q3 15, qs,qli .
"— llIa.c llI illler .
The A ccent.
3 9. In M arathi every word i s uttered in an even tone, the
ini tial syllable being alone, in the effort of utterance, slightly
rai sed above the others ; but accent, in the sense of increased
force, as i n Engli sh, i s foreign to M arathi , except in the three
following i nstances
1 . When a letter is followed by a compound letter, it is
accented as a? ghatt, forcibly ;m palrlta, complete . But the
accent may be either weak, or strong . I f the compound
letter i s composed of strong letters the accent is
strong, but if of weak letters , i t i s weak . Thus,
I .— Strong i t! a sword ;W a word W a devotee gfifi
'
salvation .
II .
— M i a:ed : 35W a bracelet ;W , a beak ;a! the moon W
a marriage 51835 d) y ; gm a book ; am?a r ;oad at?a serpent ,
W truth ;W wine .
III . :—Wealt 3 1W other ; arm a desert ; ago} an ear
Kri shna ai d the ft ; Ifiiw price .
$ 52] GENDER or sUBsrAN'
nvss. 25
Note. The characteristic of the noun is the case-ending, as thatof the verb is the personal
~ending. Case and number are to the noun
what person and number are to the verb, fitting it to enter into
definite relation wi th anything, &c. Whi tney .
§ 48. I .— Gender is a di fference in words, or their in
flections, indicating the distinction of sex flaw, whether reallyexisting or imag ined to exist in objects ;m a man
, («fl a
woman; efizr a horse shi t a mare ; (Qu a lamp, m. fi a a
wall, f .
49. II . Number is a di fference in the inflection ofwords,
denoting whether the object i s one, or many ; m a child,
an?chi ldren m a woman, arm women .
50. There are three genders in M aréthi, viz. the M ascu
linegN
ra'w, the Feminine Gflfi
‘tr, and the Neuter 3igm .
51 . The M ascul ine gender denotes objects of the malek ind; the Feminine, objects of the female k ind ; and the
Neuter, objects which are neither male nor female . Thus,
mascul ine an a father, feminine 3 11i“
a mother, neuter in:
a house.
Note — It is but natural that living beings should be considered as
male or female, but in M arri thi, as in Sanskri t and all i ts offshoots,
this distinction of sex belongs even to inanimate objects. Originally
in Sanskrit, however, all li feless objects were arranged under a
separate class, called i t; H i t, t.e. , eunuch, but, gradually, the old
limits were disregarded. For language imparts life to what is ln
animate, and, on the other hand, impairs the personali ty of what is
by nature animate.
” — Bopp .
Note. Great classes of names are masculine or feminine partlyby poetical analogy, by an imaginary estimate of their distinctive
qualities, as li ke those of theone or the other sex in the higher animals,especially man partly by grammatical analogy, by resemblance in
formation to words of gender already established.
” Whi tney .
Note. -In English the natural distinction of genders is maintained,
all inanimate objects being considered as neuter, i .e., of nei ther sex.
g52. There are two numbers in M arathi , the Si ngular
(m ) and the P lural am ) . The -Singular number
denotes one object, and the P lural, more than one.
4 m
§ 57J cl ause or suasraa'rrvxs . 27
forms drop the Prékrit anusvi r ; Sk . lg a house, Pri k. W , M . fi t .
The anusvér is an appropriate expression of the neuter gender,‘as
it is less personal, less animated, and hence appropriated to the ac
cusative as well as the nominative in the neuter.” -Bopp .
Nata— The M arathi plural terminations could be easi lv traced to
their Sanskri t originals in the following forms z
P lu. M . Sk . a?all, Prak . Uzi , M . Q’
. (fill? horses) .
F . Sk . we) : all, P i nk . w as orm . M . an (arm ) .N . Sk . usi fwall, Prak . maria!or e-sari M . r
‘
(stif f) .
Nola — The feminine plural an i s changed to at or all when the
singular ends i n i or at, in harmony with the Sanskrit rules of the
Permutation of Letters at}a river+sfl = m rivers ; an; a leech
+su = m leeches. In H indi thepresence of i‘always changes the
317 or i f; to at or i t irrafl a gardener+sffi = qrafli fi by gardeners
373 intellect 31? m intellects.
CH A PT ER V .
The Substantive (are) .
DIVISION or SUBSTA NTIVES .
§ 54 69 .
54 . A . substantive i s the name ofa being or thi ng, whether
material or immaterial, or the name of i ts attri bute ,viewed as a
distinct object;at a house, a? God, W mind, “ rumorwi sdom .
55 . The substantives are proper (fai l? ) and common
56 . The proper norm is a name pertaining to a particular
object ; as {Tin Rama, fl Puna.
57 . The common noun i s a name common to every one of
a class of objects ;may a man, “ is a vi llage,m a book .
Nata— A common noun has sometimes the force of a preper noun
and vi ce versé' m W tgruff “ a?“ m
? Have you seen
28 es snsa or suss'
rasrrvss. 58
the proclamation of the Queen? In this sentence mi? denotes the
Queen V ictoria; Fl?3 3 5 {W film, W m Ha H e was qui tea Rama ; he never swerved from his promise.
58. Common nouns are of three kinds, Collective Nouns,
Noun of materials, and A bstract Nouns.
1 . A common noun of the singular number expressing a
collection or multi tude of objects i s called a collecti ve noun
2. A common noun which denotes the matter or substance
of which an object i s composed, and not i ts form or number,
i s called a norm of materi als (M an ) as éfi‘
gold
w sugar,mlf silk .
3 . The name of a property orquali ty of an object, viewed
as a separate entity, i s called an abstract noun (W W );asm humi li ty ,m goodness.
Note.— A word designating both aquality and the subject i n which
i t exists is called a concrete noun,it being opposed to an abstract noun .
T us, matfi ai'q rhonesty is an abstract noun, and W e.“ m
an honest man is the concrete noun corresponding to i t.
59. A substantive i s inflected (fi amr (In?) to indicate i ts
gender, number, and case.
THE GENDER OF SUBSTANT IVES .
60. The gender of M arathi nouns can be determined
nei ther by their form nor signification, and i t i s, consequently ,impossible to give any preci se ru les on the subject. The
following obesrvations may however, prove of some uti lity to
the M aréthi student.
61 . R ules for Determi ning the Gender of Substantivesby their Forms.
1 . The M arathi nouns ending in at are of all the three
genders.
2. The pure M arathi substantives in an are always mascu
line but Sansk rit nouns ending in arrare either masculine or
feminine M . all?!a mango, m M . 6 1 1 a thread, m Sk . an"
a tale,f. ; Sk . 3mm Spiri t, m.
30 errors or sussu nr lvss . 6 ]
charge. trust, m. . f . N i a kind or sort ;i'wurrumour, f. , m. Q
’
a‘
r
circumcision m jesting ; m Indian corn. on, f . ( 1 1 air ; Wmedicine Rm raisins.
3 . M arathi nouns in i are usually feminine, as W a
carriage. The following words are exceptions
(a) m a bird, m:;M a jewel, m nfl'
an elephant, m
M butter, n . tm'fl water, n .
(b) A ll words denoting p rofessi on, character, ofi i ce, &c .
,
are masculine ;as tfl'
a”!awasherman ;W a gardener m a
guide m m a manager wtfl a sinner, &c.
(c) A ll words ending in i , having an anusvar on them, are
neuter ma?a pearl . (See Sect.4 . The nouns ending in short 1
? and 3'
are pure Sanskri t
words, and belong to all the three genders ash a poet, m .
m? intelligence, f . W bone, n . ;mathe sun,m . i na cow,
f . Big water ,n.
U
o . The nouns in at, wh ich are very few, belong to all the
three genders.
6 . The nouns in Q and Q'
are feminine,but those i n the
nasalisedq"
,are neuter. The feminine nouns in Q and i?are
but two or three, and are usually written wi th a or i as a
tripod, bei ngwri ttenas firm or firai ;Gi a habit, asW orm i .
7 . There are some seven or eight words in the language
which end in Si?and ai r, and which, exceptm erit a woman, f . ,
are masculine as wri t covetousness, m Bi l a mark on a die,
The final air i s often changed to 3 1'
s.“
or an , as ta, or tn;
or W The wordmi l bees’ nest, wri tten also as Hi s, i s ei ther
masculine or neuter.
Nata— The solitary feminine word in air, is thus formed ; 8k . rm!amother, Prak . mi or W .
M . am 01’
am; and them wi th the
diminutive suffix g ora?makesm , orm a little inother or a
wife. Simi lar forms exi st in Gujarati ;mai l”.
Notc. Few monosyllabic primary forms end in Sanskrit in the
diphthongs, not any at all inq; in Q only i m. , Q" being changed in
many languages tom. Primary ferm'
s in NT are rare in.Sanskrit ;
§ 63 ] exam or suss'raurrvss. 81
the only ones known to me are a? heaven,and i ii cow.
only two words in Sanskrit which end in air, 1} a ship,rah
8. The M arathi nouns ending in the anusvér are all
neuter ; tfi'
a‘l‘a pearl, g
"
? a red powder, at? a vessel. Exo.
1 11 m.
Note. T he euphon ic n is most frequently employed by the neuter
gender, less so by the masculine, and most rarely by the feminine,”in
the Sanskrit language.— Boyp .
9. A compound noun takes the gender of its last member ;
W IT-ET vegetables, m. sing . ,7l1m nose and eyes, m. plu
m bridegroom and bride 12. p in , strimwm. p lu. father
and mother .
5 62. R ulesfor determining the Gender of Substanti ves bythei r Signification .
1 . Names of living beings are according to their sex either
masculine or feminine W T a boy, m m a girl, f .
Nata— Some nouns, expressing living beings, may denote ei ther a
male or a female ; asm a person W a cat;W a hog or pig.
When these nouns are used without any reference to the sex of the
individual named, they are considered to be the neuter gender sit i n
m Is it a Kunbi boy C’ if lfir i t Whose child is that?
am mi f It i s not a human being ;mn’
wia fllfi 3 5573
there are many cats in this town. W hen the sex of the individual
is referred to, they assume the masculine or fem inine gender ; as, 37
gm aa’
tvr’
t trrfirsr?who killed th is hog, m. ? a sim:m wri tsflrfi ,
this cat f . ) does not ki ll rats,
2. The names of large and powerful inanimate objects areoften masculine ;W a mountain
, m the sea,qj the sun.
Nora— Some names of inanimate objects are of more than one
gender m a star, f . , m. ; i t!n. , so., W n. , flawj . , n. , an :
place in , f . The masculine gender is preferred in the Dakhan.
5 63 . Imperfect as these rules are, theywi ll be found useful
by the intelligent student of Marathi . H e wi ll,however, be
greatly helped in determining the gender of the nouns in the
reading lesson by the inflections of the adjectives, pronouns,
3 2 campus or sussraurlvss. 64
verbs and adverbs which may relate to them. Thus in the
sentence 3 fl?m TN 1?!i f"?m ,R ama read this larg e
book well, the neuter gender of the noun germ is indicated bythe demonstrative pronoun 3 th i s, the adjective flfi large, the
adverbW 3 well, and the verb arm read.
Rulesfor deriving Feminine and NeuterformsfromM asculine Nouns.
64 . Substantives, denoting males, have sometimes corres
ponding feminine and neuter forms, and these feminine and
neuter forms are of two kinds
(1 ) Some are derived from the root by means of saf in'
es,
and (2) some are di stinct original words
1 . Derivatives : ifs?a ram,i ii }a ewe ; arm a grandfather,
ansfl‘a grandmother.
2. Distinct words : a he-camel, ate a she-camel Wa man, {i t or HRH ?a Woman .
65 . I .— Derivative Forms.
1 . When a M arathi word ending in m indicates a living
being, whether rational or irrational, i t i s usually in the mas
culine gender (see 55, and assumes i and Q"
to make
up its feminine and neuter forms . The neuter form, however,
is not so commonly derived as the feminine, particularly in
reference to nouns denoting human beings . Thus
M asculine. Feminine. Neuter.
an?" a grandfather W a grandmother
arm a paternal uncle m a paternal aunt
mm a maternal uncle mtfl a maternal aunt
arm an elderly man gri t an elderly woman
m a boy gmfl'
a g i rl
a dog 5 1 1 a bi tch
m a fox ain'
t-fl a vrxen
shag-r a horse a mare
am a he-goat Gran? a she-goat
i n a ram its? a ewe
aim a he-wolf aim a she-awolf
3 4 caus es or sussrasrlvss . 68
priest ,W f. w ara M aratha, m f . , m a Parbhu
WW f ai n‘t a washerman , W f . Characters : trrtfl a sin
ner, qttflfl tf ; airs? a leperfl l’
rftwf .
Note — Surnames, wordsdenotingcastes, &c. , may end instrand vet
take the femin ine suffix i n! as rim Gerri , ti‘
n'
i‘q 3511 3 1 a Kanarese
man. awash .
Note.— The words 121 a god, m a Brahman, m a slave, a
d ra, wh ich are pure Sanskrit words, may assume only i ; i f?a goddess, mmvfl a Brahman woman ,mai l a female slave,qfl
'
aSudri .111 36?a cowherd, makes W “!a cowherdess.
Note.— Some Persian words derived from Urdu, such as W a
M ogul, W a sweeper, take arm? for f i t as mug , M f .
first . W e,"f .
2. M asculine nouns i ndicating i rrational animals, assume
e ither i or i vr to make up the feminine forms. These term i
nations are affi xed in the following manner
fa) M arathi words, composed only of two syllables , assume
i n thus, a? a camel
, s‘a?wf . ;as: s tiger, armorf . Fee a lien,
firmf . in poetry, f¥r€l {fi t an elephant,m f .
(b) Pure Sanskri t words of two syllables, notquite natural
i sed in the language, assume i ; thus trtra deer, qrfl f . i n a
swan, i i i}f .
(c) M arathi polysyllabic words assume i thus Stir a
mouse, i sfi jfl;W e a dog-louse, M ei j i ;was an ass
,mf . ; s hug , M fi ; a parrot, M f . ; i v a frog,
M ffg areas a monkey, W fi'
fi ; trim:an ell, ain‘tf qm a
deer, M f .
68. T he names of inanimate objects are sometimes modifi ed in M arathi by the gender term inations
,an m . and if
n . , to express the following senses :
1 . The sense of hugeness or clumsiness i s indicated by the
masculine termination an thus, the radical form mast bread,by the addi ti on of an. becomes m , S ign ifying a huge loaf
d f bread ; from amen: a pair of scissors, afirartr a huge pair of
scissors trm a cart, fromwe?a carriage.
4 4 . CA SES or suesrasr lvus . 78
78. The Dative case (W m?) i s inflected by H , errs ingu
lar, and a , m,=rrplural, and expresses the idea of a rec ipient
or donee ;W 3 1 3 331 3 i fiwm fi’é‘, the emperor spared
A bdulla’
s li fe .
Nola — T he inflections of the dative are partly derived from San
skri t, and partly from M arathi the H and =rrare of Sanskri t origin,
and at i s a corruption of the M arathi postposi tionmrfi near (am to
touch Sk . Both a and W! are modifications of the Sanskrit
geni tive terminations {at and H i thus,
S ingu lar Geni tive Sk . i sm ,Prak . 3am ,
M . m (Dative) .
Plural W ,Prak . tarot, M .m (Dative ) .
T he Przi krit, through which M arathi is immediately derived, being
deficient in the dative ease, substi tuted the forms of the gen itive for
i t and hence the identi ty of the M arathi dative inflectionswi th those
of the classical geni ti t e. T he Gujarati and H indi dative forms claim
the sarre origin .
§ 79 . The A blative case (en ter-fl ) i s made up by the
inflection an or Ea ,and expresses the relation of separation
anm sneer, he came from home tfrgvarga 11m m trait, I
went from Poona to Sattara .
N ote .— T he A blative ga or an is a corruption of the P rakri t fi st?
deft .
80. T he Geni tive ease W ) i s the substantive i nflect
ed by H T, and expresses the relation of origin, or possession,
exi sting between two objects 1m Harm fi mfi r g ig Wm , the death of this brave m ini ster occurred i n the camp .
T he relation between the two nouns sniff and $5 3 i s indicated
by the i nflection”QT .
T he Genitive case i s adjectival in character, andmay
be said to quali fy the noun by which i t i s governed . H ence i t
i s modified like an adjective to agree with the noun it refers
to
M use. s ing . emi t fi rs t his horse , plu . fl rfi i t? h is horses .
Fem. eari sfi'
this?his mare, m u n sites" h is mares.” K N
arr-qi"? his horse, tari ffdraft his horses .
§ 96] necnansxon or SUBST ANT IVES . 49
91 . If the vowels in which M arathi nouns terminate wereof a uniform nature, all the nouns would regularly assume the
HT and i ; but the vowels are, aswe have noticedin the chapterson Orthography, of various properties andpowers (some beingstrong and others weak, some noble and others mean ) , and
the nouns, consequently, assume the demonstratives somewhatirregularly .
92. Sons N ouns A SSUM E T H E Dsnons'rns '
rlvss IN THEIR
PUR E Foans, om ens IN m um Inruss on M omma!) FOR I S, AND
T H E R rs'
r Enr matr R umor T H EM .
93 . H ence there are three classes of the crude-forms, or,in other words, there are TH REE DECLEN SIONS (m aniain M arathi .
94 . The three Declensions are thus enumerated and
descri bed
I .-In the Fi rst Declension are included all those nouns
which assume the at and i in their PURE roams.
l I .~— In the Second Declension are comprehended all those
nouns which assume them and f in their m enu mal ls.
III.— Ia the Third Declension are contained all those nouns
which ENTI RELY armor the In and i .
95 . Tar. mruan onmomma!) roams or an A ND if A RE si rA ND
Q’
R ESPECT IVELY . The W i s obtained by dropping the semi
vowelqofm,and theq, by chang ing the i to its correspond
ing diphthong Q'
. (Sect. 1 l
Note.— Strictly speak ing there is only one declension in M arathi ,
viz., the first, and the other two may be considered its sub-divisions.
96 . The following i s a table of the Distinguishing Ter
minations of the crude-form in the T hree Declensions
First Declension . Second Declension. Thi rd Declension.
No change for theat m. , n. , an m. ,
n. , Q'
f’
crude-form .
62 DECLENSION or suesranrlvus. 106
106 . The number of words in 3 1 under this declension
about 290 70 and they are the following
si tar art h m an
m «m (fit
new all:
T 7
m e! is}!
was: (i s
m rai l tim er;
stilt [emitterW ei l
lm z
‘tarr
23 1 5
i t as
si s:
m an:
m : m:
were!
are
fire-mar m as
HF?
106] DEC LENSION or suesranrlvus . 63
fin T 1
firm 2'
t fr?!
fi rms fi st thwart!
fi rs i f? m mtilt i fs Graft»: sis
fi rm: i f"! as m a
Note Of the above feminine nouns,most are derived from
Sanskrit words ending in an, and it is on thi s account that they,
in spi te of their altered form in a final 31 , conform to the classical
mode of declension . We shall, for illustration trace a few M arathi
words in 31 to their Sanskrit originals in an
aria an acid
i“
! or ifl? a brick
m flour
arm udder Sk . arms-rErr? a cot
fi ll“
a crevice
are; a garland
W ashes
m shame
(i f? evening
area a school
N eta — Some of these feminine words are derived from nouns endingi n other vowels than si lt
M . W honey, Sk . 375 n .
N ote.-Some M arath i words, though derived from Sanskri t nouns in
a", assume i 111 the crude-form Emma jaundice (Sk . mm ) , Dativew asn
'
t to jaundice ; so also 3 66? turmeric (Sk, Dative
m , to turmeric.
afar
arm Fire'
s
a isrorfl firmat? a?!
“ a”
64 DECLEN SION or suns'ranrlvrs . 107
Note.~ — Some words are declined either with t or Q
”
; as fin orma shell, Dative W !or firm to a shell Hum:a sword;mmorm to a sword.
Neuter Substantives.
S 107 . Neuter nouns ending in a!assume an .
Examples .
R oot, at a house ; crude-form, arr.
Singular. P lural.
at a house Eli"houses
at a house sfi"houses
Eufi ' by a house qrhfl' by housesquail
.
wi th a house athfl‘
w ith houses
m «T to a house m -H-HT to houses
atri a than a house W than houses
ER'
FHT of a house m of houses
aria in a hon atria 1n houses
an 0 house firth? 0 houses
TH E TH IR D DECLENS ION .
M asculine Substantives .
108. M asculine Substantives in 3 7, Bi tand 85“
reject them.
There are no masculine nouns ending in the diphthongsqand fi"
. 54 , 6 ~ l
Examples .
W : A penknife
W a penknife
a penknife
wi th a penknife
arm -H to a penknife
mam in a penknife
ari O penkni fe
W penknives
ares by penknives
W with penknives
W 4 3 3H T to penknives
W E? than penknives
70 run A DJ ECT IVE. 1 15
S ing . W m. fl imfl’
f . 1 7115: m. , good.
Plu. mm? m. aim f t h at? good.
1 15 . Before an inflected noun, the adjective in an
assumes i ts crude-form made up wi th the demonstrative In ;
m t black ; m ar than? by the black horse ; W qt ifl '
r,
to large houses. Sometimes Q' is Optionally substi tuted for
the demonstrative 1mm or an?m Of a good woman .
Nata— In poetry sometimes the adjecti ve takes the case
terminations of the noun it qualifies. In the following line the
adjectiveW , takes the instrumental case-ending of the noun
m em it an?aw itm istsushi .
1 16 . When the adjective does not end in an,i t remains
unaltered before the noun i tqualifies stiera mi Sour fruits
R i m m EEK“
, What shall I do with the bi tter gourd?Note. -In poetry the adjectives that do not end in an may be
inflected
affirm surf?ardfi rm W arm, gm .— M ukteshwar.
i «i nm i?QT«if 3 11 3 “
5?i f erg?fi fi Sui — T ukaram .
721"an?11 66 W?W , strewn?um m .— Waman.
Nata — T he adjective in 3 1 is sometimes inflected to agree wi th the
noun it is joined to even in prose , especially when the adjective is
emphatic in exci ted discourse — ur§ 8111 56 1 . W QW0 my brave boy, let me k iss thee ; 3 1331 M W w i ‘fl
'
fiW IN H‘fl
’
sauna ? O my most worthy uncle, wi ll you pardon
my faults?
1 1 7 . If the final vowel of the root i s changed to err, the
adjective becomes subject to inflectional changes like any
ordinary adjecti ve in Thus m small, may be changed
tom ; ing:bitter, to m , &c ;m {fi ght in the small
mouth ; avg or git bi tter ghee, n.
1 18 . When an adjective i s used as a substantive, it i s
declined like a substantive m W W associate with the
good ;M in m an?return good for evi l. The mascu
line , feminine, and neuter adjectives ending in WT. i’
and Q‘
respectively, follow the First Declension, those ending in or
follow the Second, and the rest the Third
1 18] TH E A DJ EOT IVE.
M asculine. Feminine.
A ce m
W WW-G wri ters
r
W e ft-i sma lm i tt i tla w a tt plu lW a nt-i t
crude-formmP lural
arm -ea r
L ac.
Vac. “ 10amA ttributive crude-form
Si ngular .
.Nom. «3‘1 100 . mi ?
fi g ,B itter
Si ngnlar.
.3' A cc. avg
Ifnslr.
72 m s amscrl vn. 1 19
Nunsmns .
1 19. There are six k inds of Numerals, viz., the Cardi nals
(film ), Ordinals m ), Fractionals (M mDi stributives W ) , M ultiplicati ves (W ), and Indefi
ni tes (W m1 . The Cardinal Numerals.
1 20. The Cardinals denote the number of objects, and
answer to thequestion, how many ? A s, Q‘ar.
‘
one, am fifty .
121 . In compound numerals, such asW m twenty-one,
i nfra twenty-two, &c.
, &c ., the smaller number comes first in
M arathi , whi le in English i t is just the reverse .
Nata-Ia M arathi the elements of the compound word designatingthe numeral, cannot often be distingui shed, as for instance in the
compoundm . In stands for two, andw , for fifty . In i s the modi
fied form of 3 (Sk . Q oratwo) andw is derived from m (Pr.
m , Sk . q'
qmqfi fty) . In M arathi qis often changed to q in
composition.
Nate.— Ia M arathi the numerals above one hundred are not used
with and,”as in English one hundred awl five, would be in
M arathi Q'
afi'
i l' qiq, one hundred five one thousand nine hundred
and six, eat em w it em.
122. The idea of indefini teness is expressed by the cardi
nals by joining two numbers together, without theconjunction“and or
“or; thus, WTvia HT“ ? Strati fi ed, some five or
ten men had come ; starW are!“ W758 3 3 13 ,i t wi ll bear fruit
in five or six years m am $ 13 gfi , a lac or a lac and a
quarter had assembled W ‘fi fl 7m flit, some four or five men
were present.
123 . When a cardinal i s repeated, i t makes up a di stri
butive form : i t? 3m, two a piece ;wil tvia"
, by fives ;Q'
arfmas; in mam"Rem, each had two leaves g iven to him.
124 . The idea of multitude, expressed in Engli sh by the
preposi tion“ by,
”i s denoted in M arathi by inflecting the aggre
gate or collective cardinals,such as a hundred, a thousand, a
lac, and a crore, by the particle Si? as, rupees by lacs, W
127] m s ADJEO'I‘IVE. 73
Keri ;W W W “76m ,
I have seen such cities by
hundreds . The following aggregates are thus inflected
m a hundred, W T by hundreds ;m a thousand, fi rfi '
by thousands m a hundred thousand, are?by lacs fi r!
ten m i llions , by ten mi llions . The collective numeral
{fart a hundred, assumes the form of W ,and then takes
the Si .
This same idea ofmultitude is expressed, also, by the employ
ment of the Sanskrit forms of these aggregate numerals, com
bined wi th the wordW a limit as, am by thousands
m m fi fi thatW , this same story was in the
mouths of millions of people.
1 25 . T he numeral Qafi'
one, joined to another cardinal
numeral, expresses the sense of i ndefini teness denoted in Eng
l i sh by the preposi tion“about ; si s!Q5:m i aft , please g ive
him about five rupees ; first w ants (Tiff, abouta hundred
m en had come . It may only be used with words denoting
quanti ty ;W (far:33 sum,bring about a maund of ghee.
1 26 . The cardinal numerals denote the idea of frequencyby assuming the particle s
“? Sk . qr ) ;W once ; m a
hundred times.
1 27 . The cardinals are thus written and pronounced
1 9, gas. 1 3 u 3m
2 Q ah . 1 4 a? m , r
3 3 fits .1 5 i s
4 v 16 i t
5 Q 1 7 lb
6 s 18 u7 6 era. 1 9 m3 20 Q0 m .
9 9. was “ 21 i t M G .
1 1 u 23 i t 311 13
1 2 9a c1m 24 a? fi f tefi étmw .
78 rs s ADJ scrrvs . 13 6
I I —The Ordi nal Numerals .
§ 1 3 6 . T he Ordinals denote the order or succession of
objects asqfi'
arfirst, SENT second.
1 3 7 . T he Ordinals, except the fi rst four numbers, are
made up by adding an to the Cardinals :qt? five arr: trimfi fth 8113 eight Err= snzzfl eighth; from 115
0111 1 nineteen and
onwards the ordi nals change the final vowel of the cardinal to
airbefore tak ing HT; asam nineteenth,m hundredth .
The following are the ordinal forms of the fi rst four numbers:
qfi'
srr fi rst, m. m f .
gaf f second, m .
fi a’
tr third, m . W f .
fourth,m . zfizfl f . fi fi’
n .
1 3 8. T he ordi nals are declined like aim in the First
Declension
trfi'
a'
r the fi rst.
S ingular.
wfi'wl‘ the fi rst, m .
Bat. qfi a rmrto the first qfi fi’mr
Gen . m of the first
Plural .
was; the fi rst, m. mfg-emf . me}n .
Dat. wh en to the first
Gen . qfi of the fi rst
mam the seventh .
S ingular
Nam. W seventh, m . emi t fDat. W to the seventh Era
-J im
P lural .
Nam. emit m .
Dal . w ais t
Nata — T he i nstrumental case of the ordinals i s used adverbially;
as street?!or stream fi rst or at first erasufi a seventh time.
1 42] T H E A DJECT IVE. 79
II I The M nltiplz’
cati ves
139. T he M ultiplicatives denote how many fold a thingi s as m one-fold, or sing le ; gm two-fold, or double .
T h ese forms are made up by adding it! (Sk . q'g'
,a fold) to the
cardinal numeral as via fi ve it? W e five-fold.
1 40. T he numerals, (
"
m two, (if? three , W four, and Wten, are changed to 3 , Fa, fit and W respectively before in
"
,
and thewof in is doubled in the forms of i f? and rfi'
a. Thus,
gara double 17m! four-fold
EM ? treble W ten-fold
Nata— The forms 3 , fi t andat are the forms assumed hv fi e? tn 0 ,
$ 1 three and W four in composition ; as ak a, a frame,m ,
an ear-ring, QrafiT-fi quadrangular, M four-legged,m ;four.
folded. an takes the form of 2arg'
iu am all around ; fi n afithree-storied ; Erma; three-sided ; w e? clever ; gain? a two
masted vessel.
N ata — The word gol
' fold or time is joined to numerals in their
Sanskrit forms ; as W two' fOld ; fi gflt three-fold ;
veraci tyfour-fold.
Nata — The forms (fi t !or u’ififl'
single, gi ft-(ror gi ft double,
fafi'
fl or ffi’
g'
fl-trthree-fold, are used chiefly in reference to thefoldi ngof cloth, or a rape fi fl i i i ] a double thread. From four and on
wards the word “ i t, the adjective] form of int a fold, is joi ned toth e numerals ; and?afrfi a necklace with four folds. m may be
Optionally used for all the other numerals m m single.
I V.— Fracti onals.
14 1 . The Fractionals denote one or more parts of awhole
number ; as W or W one and a fourth ; tire a fourth.
14-2. The fractionals may be used W i th the cardinals,
simple or aggregate as Ga rza? two and a quarter, or W fi l‘
one hundred and twenty-five. When the fractionals are uni ted
wi th the cardinals, they are put first and then the cardinals,
which i s just the reverse of what i s done in Engli sh mfour and a half. The following are the fractional numbers,
wi th their peculiar signs
1 49] rue ADJ EOI‘WE. 81
14 6 . In this way any fraction might be joined to
thousands,lacs, crores, &c. Beyond the number two, as in
two , fibri l two hundred, finm t two thousand, &c. , the word
Hr? i s used to denote a half ; asm F IT!“
am:
N ate The symbols for pice, annas,and rupees are these
J rone pice, J ll two pice,) III three pice, -J one anna, = J two annas,at) three annas, U four annas, IIJ eight annas, IIUtwelve annas, 1
five annas and one pice, I= J ll six annas and two pice, III?) III fi fteen
annas and three pice, t J one rupee,t(ML) fifty rupees and eigbtannas,
632113 ) Insix hundred and thirty-four rupees ten annas and three
pice.— H 1
'
nd1°
Grammar .
147 . The fractionals are regularly declined. Those end
ing in at are of the Second Declension, and those in 3 11, f and
Q’
of the Fi rst . am is irregular ; as m to one and a
quarter, notm m .
V.— Distribative Numerals.
5 148. The distributive numerals indicate how many each
time a thing is ; asm , M ,213313?each, every . The sense
of di stribution i s usually expressed by repeating the cardinals ;
W at?you may come one by one ; (in flat ariaS1W!
bring two mangoes at a time ; m m m ama theysat down to dine by fi fties .
Note, -By affixing at to some numeral ending'
m an, the distri
butive sense i s expressed ; ecrm W , swim 3 3:as!“ give a whole
VI — The Indefini te Numerals.
§ 14 9 . T he indefini te numerals denote a number inde
finitely ; as aga many zfii‘a few,
m . plural Ii i , em ,all
,m .
The indefin ite numerals are regularly declined like the ad
jectives ofquality, 1 1 4 i ts?! many,m ien to many ; armall
,arm to al l.
1 1 m
82 PRONOUNS . 150
C H A PTER XI .
Pronouns .
t 150 17 7.
1 50. A pronoun is a word which supplies the place of a
noun,or refers to a noun mentioned before or after i t as (rm
m ‘fi W R amasays that he intends to come sfi' tri m
W i ll “ this i s the very man that came
yesterday .
151 . There are six k inds of pronouns. viz. , the Personal
m , the Personal Indefini te mar-m m ,the
R elative the Interrogative “W EE, the Demonstrative
arias, and the Indefini te W .
1 52. The Pronouns, W ith the exception of the F irst and
Second Personal Pronouns, are regularly declined. The mas
culine pronouns in an or aft are changed to i in the feminine ,and to Q
' in the neuter gender; as a"?he, tfl
'
she,and 31 i t, and
are declined like the adjectives of quali ty i n arr, 1 1 4 .
l . The Personal Pronouns .
1 53 . The Personal Pronouns W W ) are chieflyemployed as substi tutes for the names ofpersons, and represen t
three persons, viz ., the speaker, the person Spoken to, and th
person spoken of . T he form ind icating the speaker i s called
the Fi rst Person, the form for the person spoken to i s called th e
Second Person, and the form denoting the person spoken of i s
called the Thi rd Person. The followi ng are the forms for th e
three persons
S ing . l st Pars ,til" I m . , f . P lu. em we m f .
,n .
2nd gr thou get}you n.
3 rd Gfi' he, aft she, it. 31 m. , emf}, a?n they
Nata — The personal pronouns are thus derived from the Sanskr i t
language, through the Prakri t
St'
ayalar .
l et Pars . Sk . 3 13i, Prak . 8m ,
M ar. til“ I
2nd Pars. Sk . ta",
Prak . fl, M ar. Er thou
84 Psououns . 156
Note.— T he nominative lfi I and zi than are now usually used for
the i nstrumental a t by me andm by thee as, ff for tut ) {ti
mfg-3 m. i t has been written by me n-i (for an ) a m are i ts,
li t. i t shou ld have been done by thee. These are purely Konkani
constructions.
Nata— The inflected forms of i f I and ii thou are thus derived
from Sanskriti f! I .
S ing . Nam. Sk . at, Prak . wtfi‘f, M ar. lfl‘
,I
A cc. Sk . tri , Prak . M ar . i t, me
I nstr . Sk . W T, Prak . 3‘
or my, M ar . a n,by me
1 Thou .
S ing . Nam. Sk . fl"
, Prak . gt?or a"
,M ar . i thou
A ce. Sk . at, Prak . i n?orfi'
org, M ar. 51 thee
Instr . Sk . (fi r, Prak . g'
fi'
ora‘g
'
or HQ ,M ar. arrby thee
P lu. Instr. Sk . SW ,Prak . W ,
M ar. Stuffby us
Sk .M , Prak . m , M ar . ggfi‘by you
156 . Before i nflected nouns i f?I and 1 thou assume their
crude-forms z
l st Per a?! P lu. smut0
2nd 1 3 7 amThey may take also their case-forms as, tfi r 116 3 13 1 to me
a poor man, or W tram . In the i nstrumental s ingular
only the case-forms of the pronouns are used as,raw (
“
WW
by me R ama .
157 . The Thi rd Personal Pronouns i f} he, if?she, anda"
i t, are thus declined :
M asculine
S i ngular.
Nam. firheA cc. firhim
A bl. w , W than
Gen . W R IT of him
Lac. wi t-r in himCrude-form (at
tater, m am, arts ,
a im, to them
wig ;mi en? than them
a farof them
twist in them
tart
86 Paosouus . 1 60
1 60. The adverbial form an : of one’
s self, i s used some
times for W W, especially when it i s used to emphas ize the
personal pronouns as, til“
era:fi at? i rfi (”fi t I myself went
there so also «mi s1m? fi he has injured him self.
When a n: is used in this way as a pronoun, i t is an Indefi ni te
Personal l’rbnoun.
Nata — W W is derived from the Sanskrit word ant-m1 self,
changed to 3 11q in Prékrit and 81m in the former language, is
used i n all the genders, numbers, and persons. m : is the Sanskrit
ablative of a self, and in the form H i self, is used as freely as
W (mi N ,I chose i t myself, or thou chosest i t thyself, or
he or she chose it himself o r herself ; m m : we, you, or they
chose it of ourselves or yourselves or themselves — M ar M i ller .
1 6 1 . W W and era: are declined as follows
emu Oneself.
Nam. W oneself
A ce. W oneself
Instr . arm by oneself
Dat. W i t to oneself
A bl. W than oneself
Gen . mm m . of oneself
Lac. m ortar in oneself
Crude-form W .
Nate — In poetry the instrumental may be inflected ;“ minmm
film? W a? 3 3 “ Wall — Vi thal .
m : Self.
N’
am. Em: self A bl . £ 276 :t than self
A re. a s : self Gan. tart-[fi n of self
I nstr . m : by self Lac. (wait? in self
Dat. warm-H to self Crude-formm :
Nata — In the plural the crude-form of 3 1m assumes the anusvzi ra;
midi"smmiqW 3 3 3 ,they k i lled themselves .
Nata — The genitive aim !“ is often erroneously substituted for
W 5 W ET (forW )m m afia,they are going
to come to see your honour. But 3 1mm one’
s own or of oneself may
he used as a noun like the adjective a'l’tlar good. and then i t can
he declined i n all the cases ;a eqiar a or“ mi ,we should see to
our own (people) W W ?h fi me should keep what is our own.
165] PRONOUNS . 87
Nata— Some change (an: in the crude-form to un i ; aswfi '
prelim(m es-r) m fi fi
' he cheated himself.
I II .-The R elative Prononn .
§ l 62. The R elative Pronoun has a relational force, and
always refers to some otherword or phrase in the sentence
fi ll 53 1" in": i n"aft si tarmi , the boy who intended to come
has come . In the sentence, sir i s a relati ve,referring to ga in
a boy, followed by the demonstrative a”?that.
Nata — a? is derived from the Sanskri t at:who, changed to i tthePrakgi t.
1 63 . T he relative i ii assumes the forms aft feminine, and
a neuter, and i s declined like the adjective in an .
164 . There are some relative forms which are made upwith the help of the demonstrative pronouns. Sect. 1 72
as, srarsuch as m of such kind as ; M r, W as much
as,as great as W m, M as much as to each person
fl aw ,é‘
rerz'
r, of the number which .
165. The relative pronoun, together with the noun to
which i t refers, makes up one sentence, to which another is
joined beg inning with the Demonstrative pronoun a?that, sothat the relative pronoun has the force of a conjunction— the
particle wh ich joins two sentences together ; as sfi'm an".
W WW" ma (1 ) {fl "frag?stirs; (2) The man who wi ll act
honestly may be even poor . The demonstrative which follows
the relative i s called a correlativeW M .
S i ngular.
N’
am. sit m. who sfl’
f who 57“
n. which
Ace. sirwhom sfl‘ fi‘
which
Instr. w fi by whom fi at Sufi by which
Dat. SHIR T' R -W m a tte-firm W ' H-W
to whom to which
than whom than which
Gen. sum m. ofwhom firmm . W T m. of which
Loo. safer in whom i f!“ a ll?!in which
Crude form W
PRONOUNS . 1 66
P lural.
Nam. i“ m . who W f who sfl'
n . whichA cc. fi
‘ whom a nwhom ilfi ' whi ch
Instr . “ in?by whom or which
Dat. swim-a to whom or which
A bl . w i g-swag”? than whom or which
Gen. W ET m. of whom or which
Lac. W 6 i n whom or which
C'
rude oform artI V.
-The Demonstrati ve Pronouns .
1 66 . The Demonstrative Pronoun di rectly points out the
word or phrase to which i t refers ergm this boy ; ehmthat servant.
1 67 . T here are two demonstrative pronouns, viz. , gr this,
pointing to an object near the speaker, and i i} that, pointingto a di stant object .
1 68. The declension of a“? that, is g iven under the Per
sonal Pronouns
1 69 . The pronoun 31 i s changed to e? feminine, and?neuter, and i s thus declined
S ingular .
Nam. 31 m. thi s ifl'
f . 3 n .
A cc. 31"
th is {l s
Instr . ufi‘by this fi g!
"afi
Dat. mam -warn to this fem-m-fs-sm m -s-m
A bl. mgr-W than this Fag
Gen . marm. of th is fiaT
Lac. uh i n this {re
Crude-formm 811
P lural
Nam. 3 these m .
A cc. 2‘these m .
Instr. W by these
Dat. W -H -ui'
flm to these
A bl. ari a-m g?!than these
Gen . El i“
!of these
Lac. min in theseCrude-formm.
90 Psonouns. 1 73
forms, they simply retain their ini tial consonants, Sr, afi'
and er
affl who ? arm GR IT, how? 513 + fl m = w as ; fi t -t
SN T HGT so
V.— The I nterragati ve Pronouns.
1 73 . The Interrogative Pronouns are used to form'
questions; as, EFT“!“ Ti ?who is there W t GEM what does
he want?
1 741. T he interrogative pronouns are if?! who ? simi lar
or W arwhi ch or what one ? aim?or afirvfl any one 5511
what fk éfl, fara‘lafi
' how many ?
Nata — f f“!i s derived from the Prakri t afirfi i'
,Sk .
“
an: who ? 4
other aha-m; Fem-fl how many ? from Sk . GER-r?andm
from Sk . fawn, Prakr it afi srr, (am H indi ) .
Nata — M i s composed of a,and occurs in poetry .
It is also commonly used in the Deckan, but f ret} i s now preferred
to it.
1 75 . The interrogatives are declined i n the followingmanner
(1 ) i f”:who takes SIT ; GEM who affi rm to whom
(2) m Ourm which one? i s inflected in the three
genders, and i s declined like the adjective in an (Sect.
(3 ) fi at?how many?remains unchanged in the crude— form.
(4 ) fifi‘
efiafi how many ?i s declined with an in the masculine
and neuter, and with é in the feminine as fi fifi h‘
i‘" to how
many m . n m m to how many (women M an i s deri
ved from Emil Q'
éli'
, and agrees in declension wi th Q'
s}?
B efore inflected nouns i t remains unchanged ;as fawh'
m al‘éfi
E H ow many men did thi s
(5 ) Emi rwhat?i s i rregularly declined.
92 TH E vans . 1 76
1 76 . Besides the i nterrogative forms g iven above there
are others derived wi th the help of the demonstrative pro
nouns : m ,how many or how .much ; firm ,
m how much in order ?m , m m, mm of what
k ind Sect . 1 7 1 .
VI — The Indefin i te Pronouns.
1 77 . The Indefi ni te Pronouns express an indefini te
generality . They are these : GEM ,some one
,Elfi flfi ,
any one ;
w , some one 651W ,some one ;m any one 5mmany
a one ; 3 155 ,STREET, WW I
“
, a oe1 tain one ;am , w ,some
particular person or thi ng ;w ar am t, both ;Ffi afi several;
m , something , some m some few avatar: (astera few A RM some indivi duals of a number ;W , W .
811 another ; W , “ T iff , mutual , m , W e ,others ;
3 1W , Gil , W EBT, all Q'
ar.‘some one . Of these words, those
ending i n sn are declined like the adjectives in an those
in a! assume an i n the crude-form ; and the rest remain
unchanged in the crude-form .
CH A PTER XII .
THE VER B.
T he Classification ofVerbs.
1 7s 187 .
§ l 78. A verb i s the chi ef word in the sentence . and
affi rms being, action and sufi’
ei' ing of some person or thing ;
a? on?God i s (being ) ; {TmW R ama walks ; fiqr q’i'zfi
fl fi fi Govindareads a book (action) ; ant i 173 83 qrfi‘
afl‘fiafi
'
four hundred men were k i lled
§ l 79. The verb almost always expresses action, and
especially the chi ef action of the mind, vi z the assertion or
denial of a proposi tion ,and it i s consequently calledm
an ACT ION — WOR D in M arathi .
9 t run vase. 185
1 85. T he M arathi verbs may be divided according to their
s j ugati on i nto A uxi liary verbs, Defecti ve verbs,R egular or
I rregular verbs, Anomalous verbs, Impersonal verbs, and Pas
si ve verbs .
(1 ) The A uxiliary verbs are used to make up the forms of
the verbal Tenses and M oods as 11 1"W SIT? Ramai s walki ng; W 575 vrffi t I must go.
(2) The Defective verbs are deficient in some forms of
conjugation ; asm It i s Wanted m I t i s not necessary.
(3 ) The R egular verbs are conjugated in the p ast tense in
the common way, and the Irregular in an uncommon wayas
, are Walk thou, W H e walked, R eg ; errGo thou, firstH e went, Irreg .
(4 ) The A nomalous verbs are conjugated irregularly i n
the constructi ons or swi m ; as, ( Inm ar ti er firm R amahas
learnt her lesson .
(5 ) When the T ransitive verb i s conjugated wi th i ts object
as the subj ect, i t i s called a Passive or Suffering verb as, an?
tfi'
g fi' The tree fell m3 375} The tree was felled.
(6 ) When the i ntransitive ve1b i s conjugated wi thout a
subject, i ts subject being concealed i n i t, i t i s called Impersonal ;
m m m i c-1 m m a? I was sick at the stomach yester
day— I was aflected with nausea.
1 86 . The verbs may, also, be divided according to the
A genti al relation of the subj ect to the acti on which the verb
expresses, and considered as A cti ve, Passive and Neuter.
1 . When the verb represents the subject as the agent or
door of the action expressed by i t, then i t is A cti ve as rmRama sits ; W (affair Rama eats bread. The
active verb may be ei ther T ransi tive or Intransi tive .
2. When the verb rep1 esents the subject as acted upon by
some other agent, or by i tself, then i t i s Passi ve as, ufi fi;
ffifl fl l’
i fi ti g‘f W fi t?The R ohi llas were killed by the Engli sh ;
311 3 The tree breaks. Sect . 1 86,
187] m s vane. 95
Nata— Strictly speak ing when the subjectof the verb isacted uponby i tself, it is di stinct from the true Passive, which necessari ly implies
foreign agency . T he former may be called a verb of the M iddle
Voi ce, that is, a verb the subject of which is both the agent and the
object of the action as, W (111 3 5; the door opened.
Note.— Sometimes the T ransi tive verb, without any change of con
jugation, has the force of an Intransitive ; rm 8M ?! (I! am ,
the Spray wi ll beat upon h is veranda. T he verb expresses the sense
of repeated or vigorous action .
Note.— When the T ransitive verb expresses the performance of
the act denoted by i t in a’
general way, i t i s used intransi ti vely,
without any change of conjugation‘
éfl'W W ?he reads well
{it anti inf? 810mmgr he does not at all recite badly .
3 . When the Intransitive verb represents i ts subject as
nei ther the agent of the action denoted by it, nor the objectaffected by i t, the I ntransi tive verb i s called N euter as, mtrait The tree falls mi g a i t The cow got loose ; rm? sti rrerSui Edmais good; (
“
M Tfl’
tT fifl fl wri tRamadoes not look well .
Note.— The verbw , got loose inmi
“
graft, the cow got loose,
and “ a; fell i nme qg '
ar, the tree fell, may be regarded as verbs of
the Active form with the Passive sense, like the verbs of the M iddle
Voice only those are Intransitive and these T ransi tive
Note.— Corresponding to theseNeuter Intransi tives there are A ctive
Transitives as gear to get loose, {th at to loose at?!to die, Sufi to
kill “ at to fall, M to fell fiF-fi to get loose, swat to unloose .
Nata— Sometimes A cti ve Intransi tives have a neuter force iT‘IT
g ram i fl fit R émé si ts on the chair, A ctive ;m 3 grim FmW , W a?W ETW ET fiT
‘
fi R émafixed the nai l wi th a ham
mer, but i t was not ( or did not get ) well fi xed.
§ 1 87 . T he last three divisions of verbs,based on the
agential relation of the subject, are commonly denominated
Voi ces orW .
Note. T hese distinctions, however, rest in many cases, in Sans
kgit as well as Greek , on peculiar conceptions which i t i s di ffi cult to
analyse or realise ; and in Sanskrit, as well as Greek, the right use
of the A ctive and M iddle voices is best learnt by practice. T hus i t
9 6 run vans . 188
to lead, i s used as parasmaipada in such expressions as m he
carries oil a swelling ; but as atmanepada, in m m he turns
away or dismisses wi th wrath ; a subtle distinction which it is possible
to appreciate when stated, but diffi cult to bring under any general
rules. Vat -M ul ler .
CH A PTER XIII .
The Inflection of Verbs.
1 88 216 .
188. The verb i s given in the M arathi Dictionary in
what i s called i ts gerundial form, i . e. , it 18 g 1ven wi th the par
t icle aaffixed to i t ; fl to do.
1 89 . A verbal root (mg) i s the form which remains after
the i f i s dropped; as, mfi‘r to stri ke 3m:stri ke thou .
1 90. The verbal root, when employed to predicate action
o f a noun, i s modified, by means of certain particles, called
personal-endings, to indicate i ts relation to the noun . Thus,
the gerund, m to speak ; the root, i 175 speak thou ; the
inflected f 1m, i 13 1?! speaks i‘afimi’r H ari
Speaks we sit in i s a personal-ending.
§ 1 .I . The personal-endings indicate the following par.
t iculars
1 The Genders (W k -M asculine, Feminine, andNeuter.
2. The Numbers (ai rfl — Singular and Plural.
3 . The Persons (gEfl — thé First, the Second, and the
Third.
4 . The T enses (m ) — the Present, the Past, and the
Future.
5 . The M oods (Shh — the Indicative, the Conditional, the
Subjunctive, the Imperative, and the Infini tive.
6 . The Constructions (ai n'
t or P rayogas) -The Subjeetive, the Objective, and the Neuter.
7 .
.
T he Participles and the Verbal Nouns (mamfour Participles, and two Verbal Nouns.
204 ] IN FLECT ION or run vans . 103
supposi tion. The same dative particle, on the other hand, by being
united to a future participle, expresses a purpose most emphaticallya s dim (tai l-H INT, 21 5 ) hm he has gone to learn.
5203 . (3 ) The Subj uncti vo denotes thepropri ety or impf e
p riety of an action i i 3!i
f!M ari ,m fi'
( flfi . (mw , aw aitm m we should acquire that
which has'
not been obtained ; preserve that which has been
acquired ; increase that which has been preserved ;aud expendi n good works what has been increased (l fi t m mfl i‘lfi ' let i t be said to Whom this woman should be g iven. The
following are the inflections of the subjunctive :
Singular . P lural .
arr-rt sui t sui t 8mmm m strata was arrears
arm waft an? errant
Note.— The monosyllabic roots inqand f are changed to at i n
combination wi th the subjunctive suffix ; 3 lead thou ; am (3+81m m.) i t ought to be led ; tfl
' drink thou ; W i t ought to be
drunk .
Note.— The subjunctive terminations 3 1m, &c. , are derived from the
Sanskri t participial particle«a t denoting the sense of futurity as well
as that of obligati on. The W is changed to W in Prakrit and to
saw in M arathi,combined with the principal gender terminations
N ola— The Potential Passive participial an also swimand a)denotes that the action or state expressed by the root or derivative
base must or ought to be done or undergone . The sense conveyed
is that of fi tness, obligation, or necessity wara?!fl a t I must do .
§ 204 . (4 ) The Imperati ve expresses command, advice ,
exhortation , or benediction g erm-5'
sm aw arrmi ndyour
own businessqu ietly BIT? W W sis! ‘mfi‘
fl may the
Paindavs obtain their kingdom to-day i ll!«13 W titan-raw ?
106 INFLECT ION or T HE vans . 212
flected case of the object i s the A ccusative . Consequently i n
the Subjective construction,the subject i s in the Nominati ve
case, and i n the Objective construction the object i s in the
A ccusative case .
212. Since in the Neuter construction,the verb agrees
neither with the subject nor the object,both the nouns are
inflected. The inflected subject i s usually in the Instrumental
case, and the inflected object i s in the Dative case . Some
times the inflected subject i s in the Dative case .
N ote.
-Inflection,which in real ity i s a mutilation, is a sign of
weakness, and the inflected subject and object are therefore incapable
of influencing the verb.
Obs — T he Prayogas are, strictly speaking, a department of
Syntax, but we have anticipated i t as i t is impossible to understand
the pri nciples of M arathi conjugation wi thout some knowledge of i t .
T H E Paarlcrrt ns A ND T H E VERB A L Norms .
21 3 . The Partciples are forms derived from verbs, and
are chi efly employed to make up compound tenses . They are
the P resent, the Past, the Fluperfect, and the Future.
1 . T he Present Participle denotes currency of action , and
assumes a“
, at m ., Hi or trim to make up i ts forms ; am walk
then ;m , amen, am t, or $ 1t walk ing ; l“fl;flTfl
‘
fl'
I am beating .
Note. Present P arti cip le in a, of which at, at and aim are
modifications, i s der ived from the Sansk ri t present participle i n stq{ to be+ 3fi = m becoming ; F3 to conquer+stla= m conqueri ng . T he forms in atand HF" are the locati ves of the M arathi a
‘
denoting duration .
Nate — The forms of the Present tense are strictly speak ing pro
duced by affi xing the personal-endings to the P resent Participles,
and not to the roots, the Parti ci pial terminations bei ng joined tothe roots ; as am+a= ama walk ing Present Partici ple ) +6?— 'snaa
"
rhe walks . One of the a s is elided in un ion .
2. The Past P arti ciple impl ies a past action ,and assumes
h or W W1 o;W m OP t saved ; afirvfi q% fi aqfi'
afl m( 3 ? W 5?i i i-fl on a. certain day she lay weeping in the forest .
15213 ] INFLECTION or 1 ln . vans. 1 07
Note — T he past parti ciplem m. is derived from the Sanskrit past
participle passive a. changed in Prékri t to Q thus, first heard. Prak .
at , and Q , being changed to a . In M aréthi as well as in Sanskrit,
the participle is both active and passive in sense H a? int: he went
there this was said by him. T he passive ending applied
to verbs denoting motion, to intransitive verbs, and a few other
roots has an active sense ; ruin he went. — M r . Ap te.
In the Sclavonic languages, the passive participle a is transferred
to the active voice,“ with the retention of the meaning of past time,
”
and i s also weakened to I, probably by first becoming changed to d.
In Persian i t is usually active, and in Georgian, it becomes l .— Bopp .
3 . The P lupeifect P arti cz'
p le denotes an action that takes
place beforezthat mentioned in the principal cause, andassumes
W having gone; transitm tit vwi vi a I wi ll go
into the presence ofmy uncle, and on my knees beg pardon .
Nata— The P luperfect Participle is deri ved from the Sanskrit
indeclinable participle a t, wh ich is changed toq?!orm in P rakrit
In the Prakri t prose,“ there are a few instances of am being relaxed
to i t , asW form y. — Cowell .
4 . The Future Partz'
czple expresses the intention of the
agent to dojthe action denoted by the verb, and takes the
fi rmination WIT or "rm ; 3 come thou , aunt bei ng about to
come germ an?he i s about to come .
Note.— T he;Future Participle WIT is a modification of the Sanskri t
future participal form in a or H R . T he Sanskrit form i s employed
both as a participle and as a noun of agency, and the M arathi form
isalso used in the same manner. When the M arathi participle is
used in the latter sense, the final a! is lengthened Ff?fla unt 3 113 ,he is about to speak ;fl aunt!a speaker. In Sanskrit, as in M arathi ,
the future participle is generally used with the verb to be,”
as Sk .
mafi a, I will give, M . if!aunt aq1i .
Note. I t i s requisite to observe here that, in the history of Ian
auages , the case not unfrequently occurs, that one and the same form
is. m the lapse of t ime, split into several, and then the di ti'
erent forms
areapplied by the spirit of the language to di fferent words.'
Thus, in
Sanskrit, starfrom the base QTER , meansboth the giver and‘he that
1 10 oomncartou . 218
218. The verbal roots assume the personal-endi ngs in
Two ways they either modify their terminating vowels beforetaking the personal
-endings, or remai n unchanged before them.
219. The radical form of the verb, whether modified, or
unmodified, i s called, in reference to the personal-endings,
the base ( sfm ) .
220. The verbs according to their bases are divided into
TWO classes or CONJUGA T IONS , viz.,the FIR ST CONJ UGA T ION and
the SECOND CONJUGAT ION .
l . The Fras'
r Commun i on includes all those verbs which
do not change i n the base ; as,root, am walk thou ; base,
W ,the same as the root; present participle, area walk ing .
2. The SECOND CONJUGAT ION includes all those verbs whichassume i i n the base as, root, fli t do thou base,
present participle, Eh'
l‘lfl do ing .
Note.— T he intermediate i , when shortened, as when the personal
ending has an initial long vowel, he does ) is
usually omi tted in conversation, but i t should never be elided in writ
i ng . T he i lliterate affix i t even to verbs of the fi rst conjugation for
instance, they would sav and even firsfi'
fi‘
r, for fi nd?he
speaks.
Nata— T he two M arathi conjugations correspond to the San'
skrit
A lmanepada ( Intransitive ) and Parasmaip ada (T ransi ti ve ) conju
gations. The distinctive i of the second conjugation characteri ses
the corresponding Sanskri t conjugation, viz the Parasmaipada . The
3 is the original personal-ending , the Sansk ri t (rbeing produced from
i t-by the insertion of at before i t . T he g is a remnant oi'
fi t,“ the
weakened form of the syllable nwhich in Sanskri t and Z end lies
at the foundation of the obl ique cases of the simple p i ououn as i ts
theme .— Bopp .
Nata — “ In general, however , the Sanskri t language, as i t at present
exists, disposes of both forms i n an arbitrary manner. Of the cognate
languages, only the Z end, the Greek, and the Gothic have retained
their primitive form.
” — B opp . In M arath i the verbs regularly
conform to these principles of conjugation.
222] comm arms . 1 1 1
221 . T he M arathi verbs are thus arranged under the two
C onjugations
T s s Fmsr CONJUGA '
rmN .
A ll Intransi tive verbs N ,INN?he s its .
2. A ll A nomalous verbs ; a'
lert, than? he learns .
3 . A ll Potenti al verbs m ,w I can do i t.
4 . A ll M onosyllabic verbs, whether transi tive or i ntran
s i ti ve, and all the verbs ending ina? (exceptfi efi i
’
rto write ) , i nthe present tense only i i i?he g ives ;m ,m he sees but
73 3 , fi fe-vii he wri tes .
T un Secosn C omuearum.
1 . A ll Transi ti ve verbs sits , Em i l he loos‘es .
2 . A ll the verbs en di ng in g , i n. the past tense
i t remained
222. T he Personal-endings for both the Conjugations arealike, except those of the Indicative Past H abitual and Future
tenses . (Sect.
Paradigma.
Frasr CONJUGA T ION .
R oot $ 3 Base 3 1‘s ; I ri se .
Iumcarlvs M oon.
Present Tense Kartari Prayoga ) .
Singular .
N .
fi sfi I rl se
a’
“ a?!thou ri sest
{fr3 3 3 if!afi he, she, or i t rises
1 . 3 178“ m 7 we rise
2. 3 3 3 i“
you rise m . ,
3 . 3 m mm., sat 3 33 13 11, i fm n they ri se
1 14 commu tes . 22 2
Past W !m . ,m m . ri sen
P luperfect 3 33 having r isen
Future W bei ng about to rise
GERUND.
M to rise, or rising
SUPl NEs .
Dat. 3 3mm or 3 3 mm , m am orm fl'
fi l’
to ri se or foru s i n g
Gen. avatar-ii i orm w ri to rise, of ri sing
SECOND C ONJUGAT ION .
R oot Base firs}? firfifi fi' I break .
IND ICA T IVE M oon .
Present Tense Kartar i Frag/09a
Si ngular.
M . F . N .
1 ‘fi firfi ffi’
W’
l’ ‘fl 1 break
2. i i tfifi'
cfifl g;firfis’ fie i tfilfl
’ém thou breakest
8. 5T ifl filfi'
fi’ fl fi rst?he, she or i t breaks
P lural.
1 . emf?m W e break
2. gaitm you break m f . ,n .
3 . a, ear, Efi fiifi‘m they break
Past Tense Karmani Prayoga
M . F . N .
he, she, or i t broke (them)
tfif‘
ga-rm. m f . M n .
I broke him, her, or i t )fi ’rfi 'a‘ m . m f . M n .
I broke (them, m . , f . , n .)m m . M rf . filfi fi
'
n .
thou brokest (him, her, or i t)fi f
’
s’fi' m . W Tf . m#
thou brokest (them )W fi W u .
he, she, or i tbroke (him,
her, or it)
1 1 6 CONJ UGA T ION . 22 2
Past H abi tual (Kartari Prayoga) .
S ingular.
M . F . N .
til I used to break
fi m thou usedst to break
FIT, i i i , 3T he , she, or it used to break
P lura l .
snuff i n; we used to break
Elm you used to break
if, an, i f?m they used to break
CONDIT ION A L M oon.
W ere I to break , or had I broken
I would break, or would have broken
S ingu lar .
M . F . N .
ti l fiTT'
fs’ Ffi ifi m Ill tfifi 'fi ’ had I broken\ 0\ N
i firfisfim afr‘
r'
rsa‘iu i sm s hadst thou broken
a?tiff?" fil film 3 Wfiéfi had he,{she, or i t brok e n
P lural .
M . F . N .
straitm a”! had we broken
get?tiri‘
sai had you broken
am ay arrti‘
rf’
szm, ii i fiffi'
s'Ffi' had they broken
SUBJUNCT I VE M oon.
Karmani P rayoga .
S i ngular .
I,thou, or
i tem m.
,tfi
'
g fi fi f” HIM ?n ., S ing.
he, she, or i t
m ., sm urf . arm?n . q . fifigg ,
ha
gshouldbreak .
1 1 8 CONJ UGAT ION . 223
Gri mm ) »
firs t?to break , break i ng
Su p rnns.
Dat. firs t!“ or firm ; “W or i tem to break
Gen . or to be broken
CH APTER XV.
CONJUGA T ION -c0nti nue¢l .
1 . The Causal Verb.
223 280
223 . T he Causal Verb i s derived by affi xing 3 117 to the
root of the M arathi verb as
tarq'
rg f’qfi' I caused i t to be broken . 184 .
224 . T he Causal Verb, be ing, in all i ts forms, essentially
transi tive, invariably follows the Second Conjugation .
SECOND CONJUGAT I ON .
INDICA T I VE M oon.
Present Tense
tr'
f tfi gfifi fi' I cause i t to be broken .
Singular . P lural .
3 Fill , Ffl
'
, m'
c'
zrrfifi firm m,f ,
,
Past Tense .
Ix’
armani Prayoga .
“ IT I caused i t to be broken .
( I 3mm . , f , u
2 m m . , f ,
.
as
j h 3 m m u ,
a l l strafi' m
s s' 2 em f
“ L3 mfi t'
ms f ,
;S i ng . firm m . ,
-Fit f . ;-3: n .
P lu . firg'
fifis m .
—!rrf . arrn .
224 ] CONJUG A T ION . 1 19
B lai ne I ’ragoga .
a n or Ffl‘
KW I caused i t to be broken .
S i ngular and P lural .
Future T ense .
tfi firg ’ffi-r I shall cause i t to be broken .
S i ngular . P lural .
l . tfi firg afl'
a'
72 m i ?$ 3 1 n .
2. i tfig’
fi‘
ifl'
fi § Rfl film n .
3 . sir, a s s ess i t, wa ffl fi‘
rsfi ifie .
P ast H abi tua l .
rfi thei rI used to cause i t to be broken .
S i ngular . P lural .
1 . If?fl ew?m f . , “ refi firs'g'
m.,f l,
2. i fi'
fi lfl w m f . , n .
3 . sinefh'
é firsa‘t t am ari nd )?
CON DIT IONA L M oon.
lst Si ng . tfl' firefi éi
‘ had I caused i t to be broken I should
have caused i t to be broken .
S i ngular .
1 . til firsfi a'
i m . fi fe-é?n .
2. i fi sfi m a-ififl fq n .
3 . fi’
r, fit, 3?firsfiwrm .
,
-Fir n .
P lural .
1 . 3mmfi s ts-(ii .
3 . a, an, if?them-rm. ,-“ arrJ
’s-eff n .
SUBJUN CT IVE M oon.
Karmaui P rayog a .
lst Sing . an or armm an I may or might cause i t to be
1 22 CONJUGATION POT ENTIA L vans . 232
causes R ama to do the work ,— C'ausal t
'
irg~m y thfi'qrw r
graf t itan arfl fi'
afi Vithu causes R ama to get the work done
by Govind,— Uouble Causal .
23 2. T he subject of the cau sal verb,when denoting i nd i
rect agency, is i nflected by the postposi tion by means of,
whi le the direct agent may be either in the nom i native or the
instrumental case {Tm W i g? m eW e?R ama wrought
wonders by the agency of the m onkeys er gem 81W
W Inuitmfi ‘
a‘
rthi s boy causes his brother to fi ll water
“ at 3 8 TH!fifi lfi'fi'
the nurse put the chi ld to sleep qr?{LBW
W t “ (fi r the nurse seats the chi ld in the Cll tt l l‘.
Note— In Sanskrit the subject of the simple verb i s put in the
instrumental case in the causal form as (m? ma? mafia R ama
abandons his wife Causal , a tr'
t‘
rflrarm?m afir he makes
R ama abandon his wife.
Note .-Etvmolozically the Passive and C ausative forms are ali ke
in form and sense, but convey their present difl‘erence of sense only
by their forms of conjugation and construction W i th a toreagn agent .
2. T H E POTENT I A L VER B .
T he Potential Verb i s derived from the s imple verb
by affi xing if to the Root i l76 walk thou arz-errasr , W
am t-i I can walk.
23 k T he Potential Verb, whether transi ti ve er i ntran
sitive, i s of the First Conjugation, and does not take f to makeup i ts base; stu nt the ir? I can unloose i t am m ere:1 was able to unloose i t.
23 5. The Potential Verb never takes the Kartari con
struction,with the subject in the nominative case, but only the
Karmani or the Bhave, with the subject in the dati ve or in thei nstrumental form derivedfrom the geni ti ve case ;armor am“ fi t I can sit ;wrarorwrfl rrfi arrest W he can eat
bread 5 first 0 1’ fil‘flfi
'
3T W W W she could read
thi s whole book U lnaror tmrzzrfi M 11 33 35“
Ramacould
catch the thief.
23 8] CONJUGA TION ~ POT ENT IAL vans . 123
Note — Ih Sanskrit the Potential Passive Participle has the agent
e i ther i n the geni t ive or the i nstrumental case m or in
$ 153 3! or (bah?gfi:Bari should be worshipped by me. In Pra
k rit the gen i t ive i s changed to the dative. H ence the case of the
M arathi Potential is ei ther the dative, or the instrumental derived"from the geni t i ve m orm M 1 can walk . In Sanskrit
the subject is never put in the dative case.
23 6 . T he Potential intransi tive verb always takes the
Bhave construction, and the transitive, ei ther the Karmani
or the Blaine
23 7 . I t i s only when the object denotes a person, that
th e potential transitive verb takes the Bhéve construction,
o therwi se i t is habi tually conjugated in the Karmani .Nata — In poetry the simple instrumental is sometimes used for
th at derived from the geni tive W W ?fl W 3 35!T at/«from.
23 8. The A nomalous verbs,i n their potential forms, take
e i ther the “ have or the Karmani construction, li ke the ordi
nary trans i ti ve potentials
S imple A nomalous— Iii trgrN a i f I learnt the lesson Kar
tar i Pru yoga.
Potenti al A nomalous warorW “ I firm er I could
l earn the lesson Karmani P rayoga w or mm?!(amfi n e? I could teach him (B la
i
ne P rayoga) .
Paradi gm.
INDI CAT IVE M oon.
P resent Tense (B lai ne P rayoga ) .
m ufi or first W I can W 3 1k ;m i lfi or am arm s
I can break .
2. gzzafi‘or
W or mm m,u
6 {fi f flfi or h al f .
W Intrans.
1 24 CONJ UGAT ION— POTEN T IAL vsan. 23 8
(Karmow'
P rat/ego .
mqfi M )m. I can break .
l st Si ng . m afi or HGTW I could walk,I atrous.
W flfi Ol’
HS T 31 3 1 35. I could break , T rant .
Karmani P rayoga .
l st S ing . qrzqfi or WET firearm m . I could break .
m an?!orm
Future Tense.
S i ng. mqfi or HGT W as . I shall be able to walk .
mqfi or war I shall be able to break .
M . F . N .
w e, or fi rst‘E
’
lflfi a Intrans.
8. ratt an or a lter
1 26 CONJUG A TION— POTENT IA L vans . 23 8
SUBJ UNCT IVE M oon.
Bhéve Prayoga . )
l st S ing . man? or W w fir I may or might, should or
would be able to walk .
mm orwarfirs t"? I may or might, or should , or
would be able to break .
Karmani P rayoga
lst S ing. m ar?orW fitm r I might or should or would
be able to break .
1 . m ufi or warl2. W or gar
3 Si ng . m i f“ !P lu M fi -‘aW-i r
smu t-i or m et?"
swa n?!or 51mma iw fi or a im J
IM PER A T IVE M oon.
am orm W I let me be capable of walking .
RE flfi or W t let me be capable of breaki ng .
m afi or ear
grams or gar
W flfi or W !5 mm I nt:ans .
fi w fi or fi t?"xfi
'
g'
a’
r T rans .
arm-a rmor SWEE T
W I?!0 1 gmsafa ris 01
'
caviar
PA R T IC IPLES .
P resent W 6 ,
“
firm er, w as, g rammar being capable of
walk i ng ,Intrans .
239] CONJUGA’
I‘ION — A NOM A LOUS vans . 127
Present mam, firm , “ flat, firewaim being capable of
break i ng , T rans .
Past armrest-firm havi ng been capable of walking
firm -3m having been capable of breaking
GsaUND .
M to be able to break,‘
T f ans .
W e?to be able to walk, [al f ons .
Nata — The Potential forms from the Subjunctive mood down
wards are rarely used, but are gi ven simply for reference.
3 . T H E A N OM A LOUS VE R B .
23 9. The A nomalous Verbs are conjugated intransitively ,
i . e. , in the fi rst Conjugation 185, as, if?W m she
has learnt her lesson . They always take the Subjective or
Kartar i construction. T he following are the exceptions
1 . In the Subjunctive mood the A nomalous Verbs take
the Karmanz'
or the B lai
ne construction, like the other
transitives ran it?t i t:were" I should learn that book.
2. In the Potential form, the A nomalous Verbs take the
Karmani or the B lzdve cons truction , 238 as, m orW
a?M w I could learn that book .
Nata— A ll the verbal terminations derived from the Sanskri t pas
sive participle retain the ir sympathy with the suffering object with
which they, by thei r nature, agree, and hence these particles, when
ever they are affixed to transi tive verbs,force them to agree wi th
the object, whatever might be their incidental peculiarities. The
past participle at has lost much of i ts original passive character and
energy, and it consequently does not exert any influence upon such
irregular forms as the A nomalous verbs ; whereas the subjunctive and
potential particles are not so commonly used in the language as mand have not, therefore, lost any of their original passive force .
INDICA TIVE M oon.
P resent T ense.
l st S ing . a?Rm?(. not W ai
t ) I learn
128 CONJUGA T ION— ANOM ALOUS vans . 24 0
P ast T ense.
Karlar i P rayoga not the Karmani or B lai ne.
l st S i ng . i i imafia?I learntFature T ease.
In Sing. til“ fi fi fi
'
not fi rai‘h I shall learn
P ast H abi tual .
tfl‘firi
'
not fi réfi'
l I used to learn
Connrrromu . M oon.
l st S i ng . a?rfi efla'
i had I learnt (notW )
SUBJUNCT IVE M oon .
B lai ne P rayoga .
l st S i ng . f arfi lm?I should or ought to learn
Karman i P rayoga .
1 st Si ng .t arrfiarm m. I should or ought to learn
IM PER A T IVE M oon.
l st S ing . til“ fi fifi' let me learn
Inrnurrvs M oon .
fir? to learn
P A R T ICIPL ES .
Present W , I’m , Fm , firearm learning
Past Q atar-aim learnt or learned
P luperfectW having learnt
Future m being about to learn
Dat. Emma— at or titani um— arr
Gen. W ET orFarsi-m m
§ 240 The following are the A nomalous verbs
language
1 3 2 w e AUXILIA R Y vanes . 24 2
24 2. W e g ive below two i rregular verbs conjugated in
the various tenses
mt do T rans i ti ve Verb
Present Tense .
S i ngular . P lural .
tfl" I do fi rst}aflfi fi i we do
P ast T ense.
i ii er rat a? I did W fi we did
i or an“17 5
“
thou didst gtfi'
you did
$ 5; he did midi 5633 they did
Fu ture Tense .
S ingu lar . P lural .
i ii Efl‘
fi '
fl' I shall do 3 1rd?at we shall do
ri m ?! thou shalt do ggfl m you shall do
a?W he shall do FT, W l
'
, fil’
ai l'
t‘
il'
a they shall
at Go Intransiti ve Verb) .
Present Tense.
fl’i smii I go snuff 3 16i
“ we go
Past Te nse.
tfi‘fi I went and? we went
3 31“ then wentest QuitW you went
if?M he went,m . 3!7T?!they went, m.
Future Tense.
ifi 3 71i ? I shall go
i sm ha thou shalt go, 850 ” St e .
CH A PTER XVI .
The A uxi liary V erbs.
§ 24 3
24 3 . T he verbs employed to make up the compound
forms of the T enses and M oods are called A uxi li ary or helping
verbs 3 thus, new ifi' I must gO ; i t i s necessary, is
1 3 4 rm: A UX ILIA R Y vases f§ 253
253 . an? is omplovod to express the existence of objectsas well as thei r properti es rm Giff 811
°
C R ama is at home ,
existence (Wtmm Rama i s W ise , property. But the
form i n in: is used only for affi rming quali ties of objects3I3W m omm a airy gm:men i n the principal instru
ment for effecti ng man’s salvation i s faith . W e cannot say
i ?(fitm , but {fr (F3 he i s here .
254 . T he present form in Emi rhas usually the sense o f
the present habi tual or the present continuati ve ;rm swan?m R ama is usuallv i ll.
255 . we g ive below the conjugation of the verb amto be
IxmeA T i n : M oov.
P resent T ense Fi rst Form .
Singular . P lural.
3 . i i i , if}, a a”?he, she, or I t i s fir, (QT, firW they are
Note — T hese forms are derived from the Sanskri t present form of
the verb “to be. T he inflections of the habitual past of the fi rst
conjugation are combi ned w ith the fi rst person singular of the pre
sent tense
Sk . sati n, P ink . sum,0 . M . Sui , M . sift .
P lural .
l . 3 113 we?we
2. 3 773 3 then ar =t met you arez sni -l-sfi
3 . an?he i s zz'
ifl’
rtr
a Q'
SWEET they are : W 'FSIH
The forms in O ld M arathi corresponded more closely w ith
the Sanskri t forms of the present
S ing . Sk . are ; 1 am Prak . 51m, 0 . M . wit2. Sk . a ft thou art, Prak . 3 1133 , O. M . wfis3 . Sk . atri a
“ he i s,
P rak . affix]; O. M . Sufi:
1 36 T ue A UXI L IA RY venue. 255
l"nture Tense.
i f 3 13 3 I shall or wi ll be.
S i ngu lar.
l . ‘fi afi fi I shall be
2. rim e! or W thou shalt be
3 . i t, til. 3 W he, she, o r i t shall be
P lural.
and?3 11 we shall be
2. gtfl stars you shall be
3 . a, an, a smi te they shall be
N ata— The form awaits is not so old as 3 1 3m , but i t suallv
used at present.
Past H abi tual .
i f 3 13 I used to be or usually was .
Si ngu lar ,
q’
f an"
! I usual ly was
f1 m thou usually wast
at) “ aher 811 0 , 0 1' i s
P lural .
W we usually were
2. 3 3 6 you usually wem
3 . 3 , car, 3?3 1 3 3 they usually were
C ON D IT IO N A L M oon .
were I , had I been,_or would be,or would have
S ingular. P lural .
1 . at 3 1 3 3?m i f 3 a. and?was?m . , f .
20 i a "l" ,‘fi fl fq ll . w “ M ime , 0 3 l l .
3 3 1 613 ma narm f .
8 run AUXIL IARY vases. 256
INFIN IT IVE M oon.
“ 3 to he usually .
PA R TICI PLES.
P resent 3 1 3 3 , 3mm,smut, am being
Past. SIR E“
?m. 81 3 3 55?m . been.
PM . 811 3 having been .
Fut. W about to be .
GER UND.
m at to be or being .
SUPINES .
I I . The verb i fi‘
to become .
256 . This verb is regularly conjugated, except i n the
past tense .
Note.—g?3 Is derived from the Sanskrit verb 3! to be or to become
brough the Prakrit.
IDICA ‘I‘IVE M oon.
P resent Tense
S ingular. P lural.
i ii drill I become Wig?fi fit we become3 $173 3 thou becomest fi
rst?(73?you become
3?ad?he becomesIf?(13 she becomes
J) 3 ,
Ii i 613 73 they becomeL3 (73 i t becomes
Past Tense.
S ingular.
tfi I became
if.m then becamest
m m. , he becameif?fi rst?f. she became they became
L3 {113 n .,i t became
§ 256] m s AUX ILIA R Y vanes. 1 89
Future Tense.
if?i i i ? I shall become and?(TS:we shall become
film (or tfl'
fl'
) thou shalt w “ you shall become
become
a}, 3 i ri s:he, she, or i twill 3 , m , If? they shall
become become
Past H abi tual.
I. If?fr?I used to become W tfi we used to become
2. i 0h rthou usedst to become guf?m you used to become
3 . 3b 3 b 3 fi f he, she, or i t 3 , W , i f i t! they used to
used to become become
CONDITIONA L M oon.
were I to become, or would become, or have become.
S i ngular . P lural.
1 fil fi fi m r 3 f or 3 n W i lla,
2 1m m , “ ti -fifl n gnaw3?a?"m . 3 $ 3
3 anemf .
0
3 q’fi n. i ll Cl iff
SUBJUNCT IVE M oon.
Karlam'
Prayoga . )fr8m" I may, might, could, would, or should become or
have become .
Si ngular. Plural .
1&m W marti n . m ay ?m., w fi , eff
i m am” M fg mi e n . f i lm m. ,-M f r?”
a’
?
i t em?
(Bha'
z'
e
14 0 nu : AUXILIA RY vnsns. 257
IM PERA T IVE M oon.
i f i re. let me become .
2: W W
3 . flai r“ ) 3 . M T, 37 3 3 3
INFIN IT IVE Moon.
ire, to become .
PA R T I C I PLES.
P resent i f“ , im mo , fi at,m becomingPastmarm. , 1113
'
s?m.,become
P luperfect having become
Future (Tum:about to become
GER UND.
$ 3 to become.
SUPIN ES .
Dat. germ -m ; straw-m to become
Gen . M 'm is to become
257 . We g ive below the Negative forms of to be and
373 to come.
I . The Negative Forms ofwai f to be.
INDICA T IVE M oon.
Present Tense.
First form,corresponding to
S i ngular. P lural.
l . tfl‘ flTfi I am not W mfi we are not
2 1 mm thou art not W ‘fl'fi you are not
3 mi ?he, she, or i t is not 3 , G IT, 3?“ 73h they are
not
Note.-This form Is used to make up the negative forms of 3 113 ;
iffmi l am, tfimi? ;1 am not fl mfla ufi I am doing,‘fi
1 4 2 THE wxmu ar vsuns. 257
CONDIT IONAL M oon.
i f an d?were I not, had I not been, or would
be, or would not have been.
Singu lar. P lural .
di m m .,-fi f . , i f
1 m m.,-«flafi wh n mm
if?m m. awe1“ M f arrnewif “ it n . lfl"“ I!“
Dubi fati ve Tense.
i f?m i ?should I not be .
SUBJ UNCTIVE M oon.
(Kartar i F rag/ago . )lffaqrefl’ I may or might not have been .
sfi arqm m. ,J fi f. , i W W ?
g um m. 4’q an:n. gri tW 3?
i fm m., a?w ri t/fl; ifm , a nam , all aw l?
ifm ?u .
B lui veP rayoga . )tanwar? I should not be .
I .
2. E!"3 . an?m n
(2nd Form . )
large a
"
?m' ;
” u fi‘fi'
fi ) midiIM PEBAT IVE M oon.
S ingular . P lural.
2. 1 W W do not be thou
3 . i t, fit, awe?let him not be a, m , a?«he:
1 4 4 m s. AUXILIA RY vsaBs. 257
Past H abi tual.
Nola — This form is also used tfi at i f?I was not wont to become ,{ a 3m: i ll 5!i i i , &c'
P luperfect.
lfi mall “ ( i f m., I had not become smi‘rW 3?W 7
it em m m gunw mG rim m m. i nf?W 3if?m «cal f .
amfi‘W ?!n eff fi rst?aw
C ONDITION A L M oon.
R?3 ai rwere I not to become.
S i ngular .
So aJ UNcr Ivs M oon.
“ IT fit H i I should not become.
Singular. P lural.
1 . “ IT
2. an fi ‘fi t3 . m i me n Wi f
Nata— T he forms inmy?are also used cm.m . m , &c. a sgfiI should not become.
IM PER A '
I‘IVE Moon .
2. li gh taf t do not thou become M i ii“
am8. i ii , i ii , 21 =I é
‘
ré‘
r let him,her
, or it not it, tar, Efi'
a i t?“become
1 4 6 THE AUXILIA R Y vanes . 260
M arathi ; as, Si . qu a. Prak . «tha t, M . m e. i t is studied.
When Sanskrit passive constructions are li terally translated into
M arathi,the forms in a or i are usually used as, Fm slim:
N azi “ ? m W i lt?the world was created by Vishnu. In
poetry the forms in i“
occur frequently, but in prose they are
rarely used. A n imperative of dign i ty, formed with fir, is Often used
i n letters, as fli t give please, an? do please . These forms are
more courteous than those in the simple imperative orsubjunctive
wt?«in: 13 fan-i t i n . 3mm. m ar.m .
Nola— The formswith i t i s wanted, and m i li terally, i t
is said that is, then, are the only two words which are used in
ordinary M arathi prose ; the one is a verb, and the other a
conjunction .
260. The subjunctive an? of the verb (“
Q to become is
optionally used form 3i war sl im cuffs-"
r or Saran I want a
mango. The form em or gen may be substi tuted for m .
26 1 . The verbwrfi fi' i s joined ei ther to the past tense,
or to the dative supine of the principal verb, to make up the
compound subjunctive forms as W i 'r'
é‘or W tnfi'i r I
must go. The latter form i s uncommon and inelegant.
Nola— The supine may be ei ther in the dative a or at. T he formwith them i s more common in the Deccan .
262. W ilt, li ke the Engli sh word to want, expresses
two distinct ideas in regard to i ts sense of requi si teness or
necessi ty (1 ) i t may mean“to have occasion for, to requi re
”
as, in winter we want a fi re ; or to feel need of, to desire,as I want to Speak to you about something .
Thi s two-fold sense i s, expressed also, by the M arathi verb
Wm :(1 ) W ifi' write?orwarm I have occasion to go
or I must go ; I am required to go. (2) GET W E trrfi fi' I feel
the need of going , or I want or wish to go. The latter sense
i s expressed only by the form made up with the dative supine .
5 263 . The subject of the Compound subjunctive form in
may take the subject i n the Nominative, Instrumental,or the Dative case .
264 ] m s AUX ILIA RY vsss s. 1 4 7
(l ) T he Compound form constructed with a nominative
or dative subject denotes a k ind of necessity or requi sitenessthat is not moral ; W e i wflm film ( orm ) m .
he must get rid of all his vanity i R ift m , gar
W 3 11:“
am orm Wm you have not eaten anythingand you must take some refreshment.
NUta— T he nouns or third personal pronouns denoti ng inanimate
Objects or i rrational animals usually take the subject in the Nomi
native case .
(2) When the Compound form takes an instrumental
subject,i t indicates a moral necessi ty or duty m swat Infla
you ought to come .
264 . We g ive below the conjugation of the verb
INDIC Ar Ivn M oon.
P resent T ense.
wanted
3 . i f, ifl'
, am he, she, or 3 , m1 , efi‘trrfi fird they are
i t is wanted wanted
Nola— Sometimes the present form i s compounded wi th sn'
é, as
the past (the following form ) is made up wi th i i i-tr tfl" qrf
‘
gfi'
an?I am wanted.
P ast Tense.
Si ngular. P lural .
l. q?qrfé
‘
fi i ts?! I was wanted W ‘fi Wi lt—5?
2. a raiserai ms m ififl f W mffi ormafi a
-aa n. , thou wast wanted i tai
{fl Wm i i i-Ir he was wanted fi 'flfi fi‘
37573 . illm i?g
’
ia'
t she was wanted raji t was wanted ifi
' mfg-fl g?s
Future Tense.
1 , .fi'
vi sit ormarsh I shall be wanted w e?miss?
148 T H E A UX IL IA R Y VER BS . 265
2. 1 m orW thou shalt be wanted gi ft
3 . a’
i , Ffl’
fi‘
or he, she, or it, WIT, Filmi t shall be wanted
265 . Besides these Indicative forms, there are some con
di tional and dubi tative forms in use, of which those made up
with wait andwi res are the most common mm a? swimmfg?
SIGHT at a? i t? i t would be well i f the mango were requiredby him ; careritv isi t “ its he might want i t.
266 . T he person for whom or by whom a thing i s wanted
i s put in the dati ve case WET 5] W ? the rupees are
wanted by me .
P resent Tense.
(2) i t i s not wanted.
S ingular . P lural .
1 . If?fi sh I am notwanted sure?was?weare not wanted
2. igm thou art not wanted QGfl wait you are not wanted
3 . fir, fill, awai t he, she, or i t a, an, efi'
fl'
afi'
d they are not
i s not wanted wanted
26 7 . The past form i s made upwith the auxi liaryfi at; thus
Present tense, HGT {W HER?money i s not wanted by me Past
tense, W m aai‘rfi money was not wanted by me . The
present form serves the purpose of the fu ture :WET E?sari-cm
m sfi‘
éfifi'
ai warm I do notwant the sweetmeat for to-morrow’
s
feast.
N ote may imply di slike OI disapprobation as vsell absence of
was?aafi’
ren' mm fi at she disliked him completely .
Nata— trammay be an adverb ; flair, waft, {maruni; flairNO.
Forbear l do not beat him .
268 .
'
l he verb was?is used to make up the C ompound
N egative forms of the Imperati ve and the Subjunctive mood.
1 50 T H E A UX IL IARY vases. 271
Past Tense.
q?antral-i I was wanted emi t}w aitwe were wanted
Future Tense .
lfi Eri k I shall he wanted ant i ?an;we shall be wanted
Past H abi tual.
tfi an“
?I used to he wanted m emfwe used to be wantedT he other tenses, Conditional , Subjunctive, &c.
, at e regularly
formed throughout .
271 . This verb is used as an auxi liary verb, to make up
the compound forms of the subjunctive mood as war arr?
mutt i t is necessary for me or incumbent upon me to go
am an?amfi' i t was necessary for me to go W afi‘mi re: i t
wi ll be necessary for me to go. The simple subjunctiveconveys the sense of propriety or ethical necessi ty, but the
compound form wi th mrrfii denotes simp le necessi ty or
requ i s i teness :W flfi’ m would li terally mean,
‘the pro
priety of go ing will be i ncumbent upon me . The agent of
thi s compound subjuncti ve i s in the dative case .
Neta — Since the compound form takes only the dative for the agent
the simple Subjunctive form , making up a part of i t, may be regarded
as a substantive, being the subject of the verbm at, and tak ing the
dative of the noun or pronoun joined to i t as,313 7 aft m fi , forme
(new) the propriety of going i f? is necessary arlfir z T he pro
pr iety of going is incumbent upon Ir e . The subjunctive inflectionan? is nominal by orig in (Sect.
272 . T he dative supine may be substi tuted fer the simple
subjunctive mak ing up the compound _form W 3 T?wri ter or
W i t would be necessary for me to go . Both the
compound forms have the same sense.
273 . T here i s a third compound subjunctive form exi stingi n M arathi , wh ich i s produced by joining to the gerund ;
m mm fi fi m .m mfi mfi w sim
R amdas.
Oh. you are our patron, it becomes us therefore to tell you
that.
w as}arr-i i mm fi lm: why was i t necessary for me to
consider T ulraram.
Thi s form i s more courteous than that with the simple
subjunctive, as the gerundial form i s more indefi ni te than the
simple subjunctive .
Note.— There are some other compound subjunctive verbs made
up wi th other auxi liary verbs, such asqfi to fall, an? i s, etc. , for
which see the CompoundVerbs.
Note.-The verb W is used for mak ing up other compound
verbal forms, for whi ch see the C ompound Verbs.
(4 ) with It is not necessary.
274 . is a negative form of strata? to be wanted,
derived from its Past H abi tual form 3 11? i t used to he wanted,the at being contracted to a as, “ QTW FL are; i f?
we may have to go away suddenly, the negative construction
of whi ch would be warm mi “
J erri?orm .
275 . “ 75?may be used by i tself, or with other verbs to
make up compound forms. In the following sentence i t i s
used by itself—gitm your dress i s not wanted .
276 . It i s joined to the simp le subj uncti ve, or to tire
gerund to make up the compound forms; as, warfi fi' m i?i t i s
not necessary for me to go a'
ifl Farm i fiu anal i t i s not
necessary for her to g ive him instruction . The subject of the
compound forms i s in the dative case . The compound forms
may be regarded as compound subjunctives.
Note.— The compound form,
made up by joining wai t to the
simple subjuncti ve, sometimes expresses what is reasonable or pro
bable am Rw y-137 arm w ilt such a day is not likely to come
agai n.
1 52 T H E A UXIL IA RY vssss. 277 "
277 . The negative form 1 6 5?i s more courteous than wait
i t i s not wanted ;Q 3?m i you may take these sweet balls .
You may refuse by saying either eras-“Ia they are notwanted
,or
«wi ll? they are not necessary . T he latter form i mplies that
the person who declines the Offer has no choi ce in the matter
but i s controlled simply by necessity, and i t i s therefore more
courteous than the former which i s an expression of a desire
or wi sh .
278. The verb 1 6 57 i s conjugated only in the third
person . Thus,
3 ra P erson Si ngular fit, t-fl'
, t he irhe, she, or it i s not wanted.
3 rd P erson P lural ir, arr, a?1 8 573 they are not wanted .
ai rIt will not come.
279. T he negative form wi t (=r fi ) literally means
that wi ll not come,”and i s used usually to make up the
negative forms of the subjunctive mood in Elfi'
; wfi '
a t?he should gO,
— Neg . mfi fi rstair he should not go WW W?!firab
'
ri ’abelly-ful food would be got from him — Neg .
a ffirmm war fag?ai r-reven belly-ful food could not be
got from him N ? fi lfi i airs wreath-atW ar
1113 5?i nfi rm-r in order that the fixed stones may not come
out, they fix them with bars of i ron.
280. Thecompound negative form i s produced by joi ni ng airto the i nfini tive mood as, art a? arts:ai rshouldnot do.
281 . The chief use of this negative form, like the simple
subjunctive, i s to express the ethical sense of duty or propri ety,and for thi s purpose i t i s usually employed. The form air,therefore, expresses what i s not proper or advi sable as, armor
film W H i we should not show disrespect to people.
282. There i s another negative subjunctive form pro
duced by joining airto the present participle in ai as, W
m ai r I should not do i t.
283 . Of these two subjunctive negative forms the former
in the infini tivemood i s stronger than the latter. T he former
291] COM POUND VERBS .
modified, the pr i ncipal verb. Thus, winterm at “ to wear
is a nominal, and expresses the simple notion of wearing ,and
W emit to eat up”is a verbal compound, and denotes
that the act of “eating, expressed by the principal parti
ciplew ,i s done to perfection by the addi tion of the servile
m to throw. So also, 3 3 ? an .“
wash i t thoroughly .
290. T he compound verbs, whether nominal or other
wise, may be transitive or intransitive in sense, and when theyare transi tive, they take an Object. The object of a com
pound verb may be A ccusative, D ttive, Geni tive , or Locative .
(l) The A ccusati veObject (Verbal comp . ) Err gm a'
rali'
wash
the house thoroughly ; Nomi nal if s'
rtri'
aare; wear i t.
(2) T he Dative Obj ect : Verbal camp . ) arm an?qrfiI bathed
,him ; (Nominal ) firs
-r fi rst: they puni shed
her.
(3 ) TheGeniti ve Object : (Nominal ) arm si’
rohi
am qg’
fi rnone should trust him qrgfl' firm em she pitied me .
(4 ) The Locati ve Object : Nominal ) W W swim If"?541 love your parents .
291 . The compound verb i s conjugated li ke.
any simple
verb,and can be conjugated in all the tenses in which i ts
servi le i s conjugated. Thus, for instance, the servi le uni
-51
is defective, and therefore the compound composed of i t i s
deficient i n the forms of conjugation. I t i s thus the servi le
alone that undergoes the changes of conjugation thus, at
am am he commenced to go ; dram fri a he wi ll com
mence to go i ncep ti ve compound ) effart'
s W 3 she can do its
that rai n I shall be able to do i t (potenti al compound
Obs .—The M eri ghi people take pleasure in using the compound
verbs, even when corresponding simple verbs may exist in the lan
guage ; and th is somewhat extended mode of expression has a digni tyand force whi ch are wanting in the other forms of speech . The
student wi ll fi nd very valuable information on th is interesting sub
jcet,which i smore amatter of idiom than of grammar, in M olesworth’
s
Marri tl u‘
Dictionary, under the several servi les which are employed to
make up the compound forms .
1 56 COM POUND vanes . 293
l .-Tnn NOM INA LS .
292. The Nominals are composed chiefly of the following
servi les
m to do i i to g ive R ig a?to place
m'i
i' to eat at?!to hold m to strike
Errata?to put wh at to break"
at? to come
Efi ' to take flflai to sit m i l to touch
to place m at to preserve m at to apply
293 . The serviles in a Nominal Compound may be united
with inflected or uninflected, nouns .
l . I nflected Nouns Si'
lfia ma“!to Wear, Si nk-r i s the loca
tive case,uni ted wi th the servi le W to put.
2. Uninflected Nouns m m to receive a beating , mi s the accusative case, united with the servi le tetra?to eat.
294 . When the servi le i s transitive, it agrees wi th the
uninflected noun— the internal object, 295) that is joinedwith it emit cart arr (arm-rhe got a severe beating an arm
gamfi'
aryou let yourself be kissed by him.
But i f the noun making up the compound i s inflected, the
transi tive servi le ag rees with the un inflected noun which it
takes as the object of the whole_nominal compound ; an?
starter 3m art-rm he wore a coat. In this sentence airin
W i s the object of the whole Nominal sh it-rW t wore, and
the servi le ant-Tm agrees in gender and number wi th “ W e".
295 . The Nominal made up with an uninflected accuo
sative noun may take another noun as i ts object, just as the
Nominal made up wi th an inflected,
noun. The uni nflected ao
cusative noun composing the Nominalmay be called i ts Internal
Obj ect, and the other noun g overned by the whole Nomi nal
i ts External Obj ect. The External Object is always inflected.
296 . The External Object may be in» one of these three
cases— the Dati ve, the Geni tive, and the Locati ve .
1 . When the pri mary sense of the servi le i s that of gi vi ng
or analogous to i t, the External Object i s dative min?N W
1 58 COM POUND vases .
benefi t of the agent . Thus«fi t to eat, expresses an act ion
whose natural result i s the benefi t of the agent, the eater, and
hence compounds made up wi th i ts aid are neflea' i ve or p assive
i n sense as mfi 1m:m he was beaten, literally he ate a
beating . The instrumental subject here i s not active, but
sufi ers the effects of its own action . T he real agent or doer
of the action i s put in the geni tive case mfir’
m cm:Whe was beaten by Rama. A nother verb like (fl at to eat, is
vi i to take lfl"mm manGri tmm why should I bear his
reproach
N ote — The fact that the M arathi compound reflexive or passswe
forms are made up with the aid Of such verbs as singly express acts
wh ich are apparently p erformed for the benefi t of the agent, may
lead to the more intelligible apprehension of those distinctions of
conjugation, existing in Sanskri t as well as Greek, which perplex
the modern student. qqfit he cooks, A ctive Voi ce qafi' he cooks
for h imself, M iddle Voice. These peculiarities of conjugation are
preserved in the M arathi A nomalous Verbs 1 67, 2.
Nata — The reflexive sense may be indicated, also, by Nom inals
made up wi th intransi tive servi les saw the
:an"
? he became bo ld
tartar W 3 113 1 he was affected with pi ty ; WEE atfir to be in
dread.
Note.~ -There are active forms corresponding to the passive or
reflexive expressions
Transi tive P assive HR” m i l to be beaten T ransi tive A cti ve H IT
35?to beat. Intransi tive Passive on!aural to be afraid, to fear
'
ransi tive may! to frighten .
Neta— The R eflexive or Passive Nominals di ffer in sense accord
ing to the nature Of the serviles employed to make them up. T hose
wi th the intransitive servi les resemble the Deponents, or the verbs
of the M iddle Voice, and those with the transitive servi les are
strictly passive, implying foreign agency.
298. The serviles are thus arranged according to the
cases Of their External Objects
I . T he Dati ve Object lateral to put Eat to give W ar to
apply.
302 J COM POUND vanes. 1 59
2. The Geni ti ve Obj ect an d} to bring ;m to do ; “ qto hold; m fi to preserve, cheri sh ; met to place ;a to
come ; to feel. T he verbm at i s variously employed.
3 . The L ocati ve Obj ect W to place stai r to si t m fl‘
to touch m i to apply .
299. W hen an i nflected noun is joined to a transi tive
servi le, the servile agrees wi th the uni nflected Object Of the
nominal wfi m fia tm he put the shoes on h is foot.
When the servile i s intransi tive, the nom inal takes the Kartari
construction if?W (‘
fil she was very angry .
300. When the nominal i s made up with an i nflected
noun,the inflected noun may be in any one of the following
three cases thus, the Insfrumental— l'
fi'
i Vi t al to be angry 5
the Dat i ve 573i to fini sh {E‘lfl seat to be seen the
locati ve— affl ictm at to wear .
Obs.— T hi s is qui te a new department of M arathi grammar open
ed up to the intelligent student of the language, who will, however,
find abundant i llustration and confi rmation of the principles an
nounced here in the speech Of educated nati ves, as well as in works
written by them. M r. M olesworth’s M arathi Dictionary i s a store
house Of most valuable information on th is point.
II .— VEREA L COM POUNDS .
T he Verbal Compounds have been di vided accor
ding to the ir s ignifi cation i nto eight classes,
viz. (l ) the
Potenti al s, (2) the P ass i ves, (3 ) the Intens i ves ( 4 ) the Con
tinuat i ves and Frequenti ves, (3 ) the Des i derat i ves, (6 ) the
Incept i ves, (7) the P ermi ssi ves, and 8 the Obl igati onals .
They are conjugated in all the tenses in which thei r servi les
are.
l . T he P otenti als .
302. T hree verbs are employed to make up the poten
tial forms the verbs arena?to be able, fini al to obtain, to be
able,and fifth to come, to be able.
1 The verbm to be able i s uni ted wi th the infi ni ti veof the principal verb ; and the compound can be used as
1 60 COM POUND vs ass . 302
W idely as the potential derivative i n at Hami l“
W ei-i ; I cando i t, or If?en
’
s “ fi t. T he compound,however
,i s not much
used in common conversation, but chiefly employed i n Offi
c ial transactions .
Nata — This potential form is neither unidiomatic nor i nelegant
as is often alleged, since it corresponds to the Sanskrit form 353 {rgfifi t I am able to do, and i s used in M arathi Proverbs, the most
idiomatic expression in the language. For instance, it occurs in
thi s proverb . wai t fifi fi'
3 273 W m a M M rGod cannot mend
a bl oken pearl or an injuredmind.
2. A more idiomatic express ion i s that made up with
was? gari n smart tags enter-arr t s“ ?Fl ski wravrrr Hrfi'
ra
you wi ll not be able to laugh i f I should g ive you two hard
stripes on the back If?garwa s? an? i mai g ig anvrrt 7 1171 ! I have held you fast you cannot now get loose
from me . But th is idiom i s fall ing into disuse .
3 . The verb i t? to come,i s joined either to the present
participle in ai , or the dative supine of the principal verb warI can wri te, or am fissu re as . T his compound
verb i s constructed wi th the dative of the agent . I t expresses
(on 1 p .
The various senses of the compoundpotential formsW i th i t?!
can be easily traced to the ori g inal signi fication of the servile ;
i r'
fii to come untO, -i .e, to be known unto, or to be performed by .
It expresses possibi lity of doi ng, especially theresulting power
from the possession of adequate strength, wealth ,talent or
authori ty W m or W W I am able to walk, i . e. ,
I possess the strength necessary to walk , newFargai or fi sca
m ad I can wri te, i . e I have the abi li ty of wri ting or
acquaintance wi th the art of writing W aria am am I can
go in ,i . e. I have the needful authority or freedom to go i n
W firm W orW i i i-a ,I can buy i . e. , I shall havemoney
enough to buy W W W EE? ff? W m i f?!“ i sconsidering h is ag e I can hardly impute any blame to him ;
p
1 62 COMPOUND VERBS . 300
Present Tense.
P ast T ense.
tfi affirm he? I was beaten .
1 . mmfim fi m. M isfire’
tfi i
2 m st i rmas ses3 . fitmfi '
arim m. fi sfi e i fis
Future T ense.
fraf f air 3 11i ? I shall be beaten .
1 .i i i
,e mrari a m.
2. i sn‘
t-er awl-e m. W mfi 'e are
3 . fir ari a m. aHui-55
3 05 . Instead of employ ing this compound passi ve , the
M arathis usually adopt the following modes of expression
1 . T he agent, when known, is supplied W t’fl!‘
sr
M God wi ll destroy the world at the last day, for
transmi tamen a? the world wi ll be destroyed, &c.
2. The thi rd plural indicative i s used as, sfé‘
W they
say so,for i t is said
3 . The perfect and pluperfect i ndicative tenses of transi
tive verbs, which are i n reality passives, are employed w ith
out their instrumental agent ; thus,W e flfi
'
afi'
an“
? i t i s
narrated in the Purans met fi efl‘the cow was tied up
tafi an?i t i s said.
4 . A n intransitive verb ( the deponents, § 1 6 7, 1 of
the same meaning ,i s substituted fir he will be saved
,
fora i'
aT ari a a?R aff?!3 3 :he was slain in battle .
5 . A noun of a su itable sense with an auxi liary verb is
used R ITE" fi n“
(i f? he wi ll be saved.
§ 307J C OM POUND vanes. 163
6 . Thepluperfect participle of the corresponding intransi
tive verb wi th err? is used 3?fi g? ari a i t wi ll be burnt up,
7 . The past partici ple in {a wi th 373 i“ i s used i i? fi sh
-firmor (13!m an?he is sat isfied.
8. Compound passive forms made up wi th nominals are
used eqfi art (4m he was beaten .
Obr. W hoever wishes to be understood must not content him
self with using words that might convey the idea intended, but
not in the way such as the natives themselves employ to eXpress it ,
and take care,too, that those words are arranged in the order to
which the M ar-ti thes are accustomed .
” — Dr . Stevenson .
Nata — Read in connection with the pass ive verbs, the Observations
on the reflexive or passive nominals, 297 .
Nola — In Sanskrit and P rrikri t the passive form is made up byinflection, as Sk . Ferrari-T, Prti k . afitfi
'
fi' i t is done. T he letter a i s
inserted to make up the passive form in Sanskrit, which is changed
toa in Prakrit, and thus the Sanskrit a is the abbreviated form
of!"to go . T he full form ofat is sti ll used in Bengali to produce
the passive verb asarm I am made,li t. I go in mak ing . In
Sanskrit, compound passive forms occur, besides the simple in a,
as
inLatin. The Latin amalnm i ri to be loved, is literally to be
gone in love.— Bopp .
3 . T he Intensi ves .
306 . The Intensi ves i ntensify the sense indicated by the
verbwhich forms thei r first member,and which is put in the
pluperfect participle as, 3?gm Ear finish off the sewi ng
of i t. The i ntensives express a state of completion : what i s
completely, wholly, qui te, effected, as i n the Eng lish phrases
to cut up ,to drink up, to turn up, to sew up a rent, etc .
307 . T he servi les employed w ith the pluperfect parti
cipic are chiefly the following
1 64 COM POUND vsuss. 307“
Sometimes these serviles are redundant, and are employed
simply to round a period.
2. enH i ars e W t, waftwfi arid“? =ffff he has done
all he possibly could do he has left nothing untried. This
servi le i s used in reference to matters that are evi l or cala
mitons ; H i m W M ,an armsum are?we have tried
all possible remedies, but to no effect.
3 . am? W 3 11 1 fifi'
the water of the tank is dried up
a“
? Rm 211?W WET he walked up the whole way . Some
times the servi le i s redundant FRETW ? W W W 31TH?
i t is ten years since her decease . Emphati c imperatives are
produced by joi ning sniff to g o, to the verbal root WM 511
bri ng i t at once i a? g ive i t at once . The servi le 3 1 3 i is
used wi th i ntransi tive participles, like the servi le a'
lfi with
the transi tive a?m 313 1 he is dead and gone mm W
afar? they beat him to death,or k i lled him .
4 . firm W W W m Errata the A rabs put the
R ohi llas to the sword ; f‘
m H ER drink i t off.
5 . warF3 53 write off the letter and have i t ready Fmq'roi’rW 527 put water in the flour and have i t ready . T he
servi le i 'fi corresponds with the abot e servi le to throws
in that both express the fi ni shing of an action but a'
rali’li i
’
means that after the action i s completed, nothing more i s to
be done wi th i t, whi le 31 3 i impl ies that after the completi on
of the action care i s to be taken to have i ts effects preserv
0d ifl' ‘l
’
l’
tfi W M read the book and be done wi th i t ;
whereas i f? means, mad the book carefully so
that the knowledge acquired m ight be serviceable afterwards .
6 . fi ner-rm throw this away ; (mi sfit earl-cram stage
a? the pr1nce drove away the son of the prime mini ster
W fi '
W ET W Q3:he sen t h im Oil, packed him of .
7 . {frH?W attest he has swallowed up everyth ing , i . e.
,
robbed Fl?firm?any!new: “ it , he has become qui te insol
1 66 COM POUND vanes. 3 10
Note.— T he subjunctive form inm may be considered as de
siderative “ (W W “ fi m (see‘
the etymology ofm i , 259)your honour must come, e. , I earnestly desire that you may be
pleased to come.
6 . Inceptives .
3 10. The Inceptives express the beginni ng of an action,
and there are two servi les used to make up their forms, viz. ,
m at to touch, i f? to become .
(1 ) i s uni ted either wi th the infi ni tive mood,or the
dative supine a?1 rd or m m m ar he commenced to
walk ; a?arm enterfi rstm ain waft wart fire strait no
sooner did he beg in to read, than he became dumb.
(2) T he verb (fi t i s joined to the present participle in Hr;
{73 11 are?"mar the king began to speak mew-“r8311 you may
set off 35!set beg in to give beg in and go through the act) .
7 . Permiss ives .
3 1 1 . T he Permissives are composed of the infi ni tive
mood and the verb i‘fi ' to g ive W are?Q T permi t me to go ;
am Fer; eawri t the wind wi ll not let me write lfl‘
W ET Ere:
W am?I wi ll not let him do come .
8 . Obligationals .
3 12. These compounds express Obligation or moral
necessi ty . T he servi les employed to make up these forms
are to fall, trrfi’f-r it i s necessary, Km? to touch, and
srfi to be.
1 . T he servi le 11 3 3?is joined e ither to the dative, or the
geni ti ve supine of the princi pal verb i W W WW m t W orm a nm a as you are suffering from
fever, I am obliged to go backwards and forwards ; WW W or W m I was under the necessi ty of walk
ing up to there . The verb i s conjugated throughout wi th thesubject in the dative case but when the principal verb is i 11
transi tive , the servi le is put in the neuter singular, and
when i t is transi tive,i t agrees wi th i ts object : arm Eirzzrr
Erratum or am t !"wearer he i s forced to go about .
3 12] COM POUND vases. 1 6 7
2. m has been previously considered under the M odal
verbs (Sect . It i s used wi th the past tense of the prin
cipnl verb; srrsr{T i fl'
fl‘m i fi ' qrfi
'i ri t is necessary for me to go
to night . It expresses either a physical or moral necessi ty,
and takes the subject ei ther in the instrumental or dative
case. The verb with the instrumental subject usually expresses
a moral necessi ty tarQfi I ought to hear .
The verb with the subject i n the nominative case expresses
what is necessary or essential to an event, and conveys inten
sively the sense that a verb wi th the subjunctive of sum to be
doemwrwfi fi fl éwflm at a? ifit 57m vrrfi if we
should say that he commi tted the theft, then he must even
have gone there ;his going there i s essential to the supposi tion
that he stole . {IT firm m expresses a supposi tion in a
general way.
3 . The servi le arm is joined ei ther to the subjunctivemood, or to the dative supine m ar graf t snfi emi t a ma re 3mm m emitE ffie: should he not succeed i n doing
our busi ness, we shall be under the necessity of troubling you
{item W , w W i t l“
n-«fi e w e m et?! since Khandu
has run away, R amj i will have to pay the money . I t speak s
of a responsibi li ty or duty which may or may not be moral ,
and i s used as a courteous form of urgency tm fi aiar aft?
afi‘
m your honour will have to go Sect.
4 . The geni tive sup ine of the principal verb i s joined to
the tenses of the verb snfi m armies:err-mi "3e you have
to go even now. It denotes an incumbency expressed by the
Eng li sh phrase made up wi th“ have,
” followed by an infin itive,
as you have to go to-night.
The form can be used regularly in the present and past
tenses only— 11m are“?an? I have to go W are"?éfi
‘ I
had to go in the future tense, use i s usually employed m“
5111 173”m I shall have to go . T he regular future wi th win:
is usually dubi tative W W I may have to go.
T he subject of thi s form i s usually in the dative case but
i n the past tense, i t may take the instrumental case, when i t
1 6 8 coneoonn TENSES. 3 13
denotes a moral responsibility as, t ar 517 3 e i f}? I should
have gone. It has the same force as the past tense of the
simple subjunctive ;t af 3 11?i t?orman?fife}.
N ote .— The form may express the intention of the agent in an em
phatic way ;3 antm i am they have decided to go to-morrow.
Nata— It may denote what i s necessarily dependent upon the di s
positi on or nature of a person or thing fir m fl'
Ffl’
i fi
m ar he is such a man as wi ll surely one day or other do m i s
chief wim m m firm s w anem ia gafi the stone
struck hi s ear, and it the ear was ready to break ofl’, but the act
was deficient by a little, i . e. , the ear was wi thin an ace of bei ng
s truck off.
C H A PT ER XVI II .
The Compound T enses .
3 1 3 3 3 1 .
3 1 3 . T he S imple T enses given in Chapter XII I. do not
answer all the purposes of expression, and consequently com
pound forms are made up by the aid of the substantive verbs
T he substantive verbs are joined, ei ther to the particip les of
the principal verb, or to its s imp le tenses thus, a"? fi tter 3 1 13
he i s writing wrath?"Ti-Tarafi ‘wfi a swim?fi ’tfi (fi ll my ma
ternal aunt gave me thi s ring on my bi rthday . In the latter
sentence the substantive verb i s joined to a simple tense the
past of the principal verb, and in the former, to a partic ip le
the present of the principal verb.
3 1 4 . Both the members of the compound tense are i n
flected in conjugation , unless the first i s a participle end i ngin the inherent at as fii
’
arm? gfi f I was si tting , i f?I had sat. In the former sentence the participle aim is not
inflected, but in the latter, both the verbs are inflected.
3 1 5 . The C ompound Tenses express M ODIFICA T ION S of
the Pri ncipal Simple Tenses The Present, the Past, and the
Future .
1 70 OOMPOUND rsnsns. 3 20
3 . ThePresent P erfect i s the past tense wi th the verb an?fl
“
t flfi l‘an?I have sat.
4 . The Present H abi tual i s the present participle in a and
the present tense of the verb afl fi ; an? H im raw armfishes live in the sea.
5 . The Present Prospective is the future participle wi th the
verb 3 113; If?Emma:an?I am about to learn.
6 . The Present Dubi tative ‘wi th the present
participle and 3mm ; H?m 3mm the dying .
P ast T ense.
320. l . The P ast Imperfect or P rogressi ve i s the present
participle in i f wi th the past tense firm was; {Elw in (;asm as;
m at that i nstant a tiger was approaching .
2. The Past Perfect or P luperfect T ense i s formed wi tht
the past tense and the past tense Em unfi t fi-mrm first
fi fi i fi‘Ere-gt tar tuft?
“ j ust after they had placed her on the
bier I saw her efl' ire: {traits
'
ifi'
she had become cold.
3 . The P ast H abi tual i s the present participle in a and
the past habi tual tense of anfi ;W m «T m fi a t man
"
: havi ng erected a temporary watchtower, that Brahman
was in the habi t of dai ly si tting ‘
on i t.
4 . The Inceptive P ast i s formed of the present participle
ending in «rwi th the past tense of the verb i f?“ M i nfi ll“
m Dhritarashtra began to Speak .
5. The Dubi tati ve Past i s formed with the past tense of
the verb and were" ; i t W was" he must have walked.
6 . The P ast P rospecti ve is the future participle with the
past tense of the verb si li fi m m fimr 3 3 3?”I?mI was going to write when you sent the man .
Future Tense.
3 21 . 1 . The Future Imperfect or P rogress i ve i s the
present participle with W ; If?am W ETgi ftEll? m afi fi
I shall be waiting for you at twelve O’clock .
1 72 COMPOUND rs us . 3 25
Future Tense.
3 25 . 1 . The Future Indefini te i s the future participle
in HIT with the s imple condi tional of snfi’
fi rsmm' m GT
i f i fi it would have been well i f he had been going .
2. The Future Dubi tative is the future participle in WI!“
with arm ; 3 1? inarm ema'
r, at an aim should he be
going , then tel l me .
Tns SUBJUN CT IVE M OOD.
3 26 . The subjunctive proper expresses duty and the sub
junctive form in mi , when employed wi th the subject in the
instrumental case, usually expresses thi s sense t an“
i n? I
ought to go .
Nata— T he subjunctive with the subject in the nominative case
expresses ‘doubt or uncertainty, and produces the dubitati ve forms of
the indicati ve. The simple subjunctive form is made up w i th the
termination an? joined to the simple verb Sect. and the
compound subjunctive wi th the auxi liary verb S1 3 W jOlned to the
simple subjuncti ve taran é‘
fi' I ought to have gone .
N ote.— The subjunctive has other compound forms wh ich are
given under the M odal verbs (Chap . V II ) .
$ 327 . The subjunctive has one compound form for the
Present Tense, and two for the Past. I t has none for the
Future.
Note.— Duty is ever present, and the verbal forms therefore usually
denote present acts of duty . A n accomplished act of duty may be
viewed as past, but a duty that is not performed always remains
present ; and hence the subjunctive mood i s deficient in future
forms.
Note.— There are however some future forms produced i rregularly
to express the sense of future Obligation . T here are four such forms
W fi fi mi re I shall have to go WEST fifi mfg-fi g i t shall be
incumbent on me 10 go 3WIT fi wfigfi a it shall he my duty to go
newsmufi (13 8 I shall be under the necessi ty of going.
1 74 PA R A DIGM A S or mass. 3 3 2
CH A PT ER X IX .
PA R ADIGM A S or Vnsss .
g ive below all the tenses, simple com
full forms of conjugat ion
1 . Fras'r CONJ UGA '
rrON .
Intransztive Verb .
Tns INDICAmvn M OOD.
Present T ense .
(l ) The Present Indefini te.
d k
S ingular . P lura l .
(2) The Present Imperfect.
I am walking .
m a arise
area 3 113
(3 ) The Present Imperfect Emphati c.
I am walking .
fi rearmsa"? W e“ ?
W “ m“ )“a
.
“ f‘: W I “ R I
were?m . , Eff ,
i
t?n . we ares-must
(4 ) The Present Perfect.
I have walked.
l . wraiths-5 are
2. W i tt-5}swim3 . W e ft-ti an?
3 3 2] PA RA DIGM AS or vanes . 18?
Future Tense.
(l ) T he Future Indefini te.
If?m m were I going to read, or I should
be going to read.
w u smm m. ,-“i i i .
n
m m ms m fi , fi u umw swat
m m m. ,-riff s i t n. W m ,m ,w
(2) T he Future Dubi tati ve .
zfi‘W BR EE? shou ld I be going to read .
SUBJUNCT IVE M oon.
P resent T ense (Fi rst Form) .'
I he N euter Constructi on.
tararr-mi I should read.
m or arm?m’
af :
m or gi ft n .
urn E lia?
T he Obj ecti ve Construct i on
m m I should read.
Second Form.
The Objecti ve Constructi on .
m m Ema?it i s necessary for me to read.
W orm m . , fi n, n . mamm m, film ,
1 90 PA RA DIGM A S or vases .
III .— Neg ati ve Conjugati on.
3 3 3 . The Negative forms of the Tenses g iven under th e
First and Second Conjugations are produced by employing the
Negative forms of the verbs v i tal to be and ifi rto becom e,
given under Section 255 . Thus
INDICA T IVE M oon.
P resent Indefini te.
sfi' I walk N eg. i f?m =rr€r I do notwalk .
1 . di m-same? W W W .
2. i m am3 atwfh
'
fi nm m‘i‘ na n afi m mfi a.
P ast Tense.
'fl"flTB
'i‘irI walked . Neg . IIfi‘am tW I did not walk .
1 . fi m mfi m. W amfirmfl‘.
3 . a?mm are? 3 was?wri ts
Future T ense.
i t I shall walk . til 5!e are?I shall not walk .
1 . i f are-sum mi t amt?arena fluff.
2. s are-"rmW T33 Q‘s?amour are?
3 fiifi f. W i re?
3 3 4 . From the forms g iven above the student wi ll be
able to produce forms for the other tenses ; but we shall g i ve
below the Fi rst Person Singular form for each tense by w ay
of guidance
IND I C A T IV E M OOD.
Present 'fi'
area‘
l éi‘I do not walk .
317 are?I am not walk ing .
i f? wri t I have not walked.
tfi W near I am not wont to walk .
3 3 4 ] Pan oramas or vases. 1 9 1
Perf . lflqrmfi '
“ i f I had not walked.
H ub. (1 ) IR (or Ifi fl'
fi rst) I was notwont to walk .
H ub. (2) if?W a? I was not wont to walk .
Fu ture Indeffi fi W wri t (or i f?=r 1 1rd? ) I shall not walk .
Imp . tfi W Ha? I shall not be walking .
I ncepflfi‘fi rst!"from:art?I shall not begin to walk .
Perf . i f 1mm"
?fl ? I shall not have walked.
Dub.i f?m am I must not be going about to
walk .
CONDIT ION A L M oon.
Dub. HTarm w e?should I not be walking .
P ast Indef fr N d?i f I should not have walked.
Dub.{ifm wai tif I really shouldnot havewalked .
F u ture Indef .ifl
' if I had not been about towalk .
Dub. afi'
fi rm if I should notbe abouttowa lk .
SUBJUNCT IVE M oon .
P resent Indef . fl ai l”
sometimes “ If 51 W 3“ ) I shouldnot walk.
Imp . m m wfi fi or n rr arm am? I should
not be walk ing .
P ast Indef. W W i t i t‘d orW and I should not
have walk ed.
shall not be bound to go.
) w and M a n ual =rW e Itwi ll
not be necessary for m e to go.
l92 run n arrow s . 3 3 5
Future ( 3 rd Form ) am mi m ent and?I shall not be n u
der the necessi ty of go i ng .
sa m ri’
t wm air? I shall not be
under the necessity of go i ng .
l u r s su lvs M oon .
1 . fi H rT-i wifi’
rorwf rfl ré am we; was“
? or af t
shall I not walk shall we not walk
2. i fi l‘fwaif:do not walk 5 23? W W do not y ou
thou .walk .
3 . air, t let h im, intend? =r mi re let th em
her or i t not walk . not walk .
Inrmrrrvu M oon .
H’w not to walk .
PA R T IC IPL ES .
P resent. =rW ,=r 1mmm at not walk ing .
Past . =rerratum ,=rm west not walked.
P luperfect. =r5 471-1 havi ng not walked .
Future. =ramour, =rfi rem rnot being about to walk .
Gs nus n.
3 W ,not to walk .
SUPIN ES .
Dat. =r 3 1781q not towalk . Gen. 3 W of notwalkin g .
C H A PT ER XX .
TH E P A R TICLES OR INDECLINA BLE WORDS .
Th e A dverb.
3 3 5 3 60.
3 35 . A n adverb i s a word which quali fies an adjecti ve ,
a verb, 01'3 3 0th” adverb i‘h’
WIT m S“ ? be i s very wi se
W ‘
al’
go there ;arr ( Q waft!“
you should walk a little
slowly.
194 rm: PA R T ICLES . 3 4 1
(1 ) T he reduplicated present participle in a expresses
the manner of an act ; as, 8mm (1mm si tar he came
stumbling 1n the dark .
(2) The reduplicated present participle in a? expresses
the cum'
ency or continued course of an act ; as, wraai 211Wi tfilm he slept whi le reading .
(8) The reduplicated past participle, inflected bymor Eli ,
expresses usually the conti nuance of ei ther a posture or position
of the body, or a state of mind ;w earm mfi ' ’c’fi
'
rtrgj afififi'
as he kept si tting he fin ished i t ofi‘
saw-“m NW T whether
standing or si tting ) arm if?q‘l'
fl'
Sli t she used to beat him at
all times ; a t?!M errat a?airin! fl i fi fi‘
efl'
she told the story
wi th consternation . Sometimes the an or a?i s joined to an
adjective expressive of an atti tude W M an“
? i t?“ I will
go and come back immediately.
Nata — T he at or Eli“ is an abbreviatio n of the instrumental case d!
w aif 01‘W fi a eafi or
Nata — The form inm is sometimes used condi ti onally sit mi :1325 ; an «riff he wi ll not go hence, do whatever you might.
fi at is more forcible than'
éfi Fzrfi .
(4 ) T he reduplicated pluperfect participle expresses man
ner forcibly ; eufi'
W W mesaEmil; he beat himself most
cruelly Ifi‘W mg?! I got ti red by si tti ng ever so
long .
3 4 1 . (5 )'
l he simple present participle i n a‘
, and the plu
perfect participle in m ,are used adverbially, to denote the
manner in which an action i s done i f} tar-r she went away
weeping wfir 3 72171 E535 he did i t i ntentionally arm“
3"
W651 1?we should do i t uni tedly ; w W fires
-r? we should
speak considerately .
3 4 2. By the aid of the geni tive case ending s, the inde‘
clinable adval bs are made into adjectives ;“
Elfi fl atmfi fi'
fi fl fd
m an?his present state of l ife 18 very good W firm?an arm 31a?é
‘
ffi he should have come to see me to-day .
1 96 THE n arrows. 3 4 5
Qfi'
and (all? are used substantively;m trillstarW W W
firm arfi you will not see such things at our house ; gm
m wfi ufi fiwfiw éfi a how long wi ll he stay at your
house
(3 ) The uses of m , saw how much firm . sw am .
so much , g rew, so much, fi rm .W t as much, are gi ven under
the uses of the pronouns.
Nole — alt and an?are always conjunctions, but at and aft are
adverbs as well. Ht means“ indeed
“ but,” however,
”&c. tfii at
term i n am? sfi {rm a n 8531 attfi I am indeed h is father,and
how could I do such an act il ggfl at m ( 1 3 m i 3 1173:ch as;
311 8 “ i i i 11 3 151, You indeed ask a lac of rupees and I am but
qui te a poorman. at}denotes“at least
”
flai r W 3 as? (i i i mayS1 3W? A t least two hundred rupees might have been expended.
3 4 5. One of the pronominal adverbs i s repeated, or
joined to another adverb, to make up adverbial compounds
T he followi ng are compound adverbs denoting time
anfi afi tfl'
now and then,sometimes
él'
ss’
i drag?whenever"
was?'
e‘
rag'
i always
3 73 3?and sometimes
3735?anfi‘whensoever
ain‘
t ‘Tlfi never
fi antisome time or other
some time or ever
emf?at“
?now and again
area?amfi indefinitely
84 6 . Compound adverbs of place, manner, &c. , could be
produced in the same manner 3 p} wherever; 3 1131 am,spar
arm somehow or other In} 313} hereand there, everywhere, &c.
34 7 . A ny other adverbs might be employed to make upadverbial compounds : i
‘fi t dai ly W i requently ;33 : gm
agai n and again.
3 48. The adverbial particles are thus classified
200 rs s n arrows. 3 4 9
(6 ) Adverbs of R elati on.
W when ;fl i t?wheresoever m as fi g?
(7) Adverbs oj Demonstrat ion.
Q5} here ; ai r-there; Q
'
egf now ;W then, m like thi s, so
am like that, so ; gay? hither , fi fli@ thither.
(8) A dverbs of Interrogati on.
when shit where ?m why W HY? Where mi
(9 ) A dverbs of Imzta i z'
on .
m m , m em?wi th a. clang , qu ickly, briskly .
H , W , W , W fi‘
fi é‘
b Wzmfl‘, pop at once .
m y W ;t it an-r, weren
‘t. tram , m art, gulpingly .
I I . — P ostposi ti on3 .
3 4-9. A. Postposi tion is a. word which shows the relation
of a noun or pronoun to some other word in the sentence
é‘
rsm earnew m he took his seat.
Note. A t the bottom of all genuine postposi tions, at least in
their original sense , there exists a relation between two opposite
directions,thus
,
“over,
” “from ,
” “ before,
” “to
” have the relations
under,” “
i“towards
,
” “ from,
as their counterpoles and points
of comparison, as the right is opposed to the left.”— Bopp .
Note.—Postpositi ons, as well as all other particles , were originally
nouns, verbs, &c. , (l ) P ostposi tions : — 35% at,from sag a side ;quit"
inside,f1 om quamiddle , fi
'
smf about, from raw matter ; as“ by
means of,from Ema} to do (2) Conj unctions t— Efifl
'fl l
’ “ for,
” from
mm a reason ;me
ga therefore,fromw ar to say . When particular
nomi nal or verbal forms become stereotyped as relati onal words by
constant use,their original character gradually comes to be forgotten
and often thei r orig inal form i s modifi ed. T hus, are?at,i s the crude
form of an? a side,
and signifies nothing but at,
to,
towards .I ts full dative form is, also, sometimes used m 3
towards this m afi a t owards that.
3 50. T he noun to which a postposition is joined assumes
i ts crude-form 88 before the postposi tion in:a house,
strum ? from a house . The postposition serves, i n fact,
nus Pans-10 1 13 8 203:
N Gi sh — W andM aignwonly without or except ; morqi gg j t ai rdo not come wi thout taking i t, but firm expresses
some more ideas. I t expresses besides, (2) without or except, .
in c omposi tion, addi tional or extra m un} m m ,
we? besides this he said someting else am am?am} dc ~
not go wi thout me Rm: w or i tfhr w extra-collections. The
postpos i tionGi ft agrees wi th fi m inmll the senses offi lm . “ I ;
i s used, in addi tion, to express the sense of exclusion, . wi th certai n
verbs like mat to do. i fi to “ 13m m “ : m or e-am w 36 5i" excepti ng me all the others were invi ted . .
N ata — fi lm! expresses besides» as well as wi thout or
except,”wh i le W has only the latter meaning ; “ Fi fi m
m m are?I have none except him mm m W i lli}m mar.W I have two brothers besides these two.
Note — The postposi tion fi along wi th; is neodi 1 0 poetry;
[IL— Conjuncti
3 5 6 . A conjunctiomm s word:used:to connect:the difier
out parts of an extended sente nce, or two afli rmations s-ai ' s
A nrungzebe, having left Barhanpur, went to M alwa and joinedM urad ; can?! as W . W in fi rm m ama" m .
Stat esm an? arch ; tri gm 5?W -m firws és min at
g naw fi at, w m m fiat, he was generally liked . for
h i s pleasing address, but was suspected to~ have takenrpart in .
the great robberies in the Konkan .
Notc.— Eren-when the conjunction appears only! to connect two .
words,it really connects two sentences . Pestpos-itions connect two .
actions conjunctions, two pmpositions. .
3 57 . The conjunctions are thus classified
1 . Those which uni ts sentencesr ifn form as woll’
ae in mean
i ng , are called Copulati ve Conjunctions,W , W , I , mand
f f, 5‘that ; 6 ,m also ; w also, l ikewise ; W that is
fi rm nay ; thus, ai m m , s i t W sch you are not onlya. liar
,but also a thief : i t“ I 3 3 a horse and an ox .
rm: n arrows.
Note.— i ’
that, iaused chiefly in old wri tings ;hi?fisfi fi'
i t?3 , amm w “ N il W Sui ,
It was written there that we should maké
peace and become one.
2. Those whi ch join sentences together, bu t di sconnect
thei r meaning, are called Disjunctive Conjunctions fi rm, w ar
aft. amt , an or . Thus, unfit «new emit’
i P‘
s-at ars e-i
R ama or hi s brother must have done it.
3 . Those which connect sentences , but ex'
press contrari'
e ty
of senses,are called A dversative Conjunctions : qw, fi g , qfi
'
,
«(of but, am at?though, afi , FP-lTfi sti ll. Thus , mini W T
m Gri
t" m w ,
Shabaji assured them that he was not
implicated in it, sti ll the court of Bijapoor did not beli eve him ;mm s fssfi fi afi w warm, aft arm fi w avm fr
‘
t
m 773 1 mi l Sb1vaji was very much distressed by this apprehen
sion, but he did not submi t to such a treacherous enemy .
4 . Those which state a reason, or purpose, are called Causa
tive Conjunctions ; 65?f t,m m 0:5 ?becau se, in order that im therefore
,in order that ; Si t-l tfi
'
,arm ,m asftattherefore ;
swat now, i n present ci rcumstances . T hus, at SIN G
”
!i s
erst?a re fi fe treat , am an m u cogs a rom am m383 7 he apprehended that he would take revenge on him ,
and therefore he ordered him at once to be assassinated .
Note is derived fromm at. to say, and means li te rally, th is
being said, thi s being the fact. I t has these senses
1 . It has the sense of therefo re m fi réft WF!"W 3 1 3 i?!m 3 be abu sed me and there lore I s lapped
h im i n the face .
2. It has the force of the demonstrative pronoun a, used at
the end of. a sentence to make i t distinct and prominen t ; a?
gi t at? i f? W W he said that he would come to your
house ; Sfifl l’
W WIT i t“ ? CREE “ If?mango is a good frui t .
3 . I t has the sense of “called
”
; {m R U5 W M RN I
i n" there was a son of A braham, called Isaac .
206 rm: n arrows; 3 6O
fagh !an?!1“ fi ssure ! save !.mercy l (c) reproach : (q, a}!
shame !(d) prohi bi ttonaa‘i or t i no don’
t l. hush !, (e)i ndzfi erencc : sf: umph l
5 . Those used in addressing persons masculi ne, sfi , 3
O fem. “ if, i l’ O l aw masc. or form plus , masc. or fem.
wi t O '.
NOteo-“ fi‘and?are
-not respectful forms, but are frequently used
in contempt or cudcarment the same is true of si r, h at m W
m i m m fll my chi ld, why de st thou cry sti ll fl ,ark
m m 33 . H Tw m 0 belon di you: wi ll see your chi ld
again in that H appy Land ; sift {aim m m ?0 fool, whaashall I
say to thee singular-j ut respecttul; 3 gm, 1 m @ God save
me .whichois plural, is used inaddressing superiors and others to
whom we wi sh to ~ bc formally courteous ; an} W W !" fi
rst Wi llisin, in th is he is not blhmable an? m , Ezra} ;fi
'
ffi m0 worshippers, praise God, A religi ous mendicant or teacher
,
whose rel igions character gives him a= superiority over even-kings,might sayr i W , yfi W . 0 king; "my thou he happy ;:but
every other person would use an} , w i s used familiarly, though»
respectfully, in addressing. a man or woman am “ If?! m . a
( dfi snafi O sir !‘
you. have fongotten i t all
$ 3 60. T here area-few words iu the laugm ge; which: are
not necessary to make up the sense of a sentence; but are
sometimes i nserted to fi ll‘a vacancy, or for ornament ; If?“
W W i ti’
n'
, I wi ll just sit readi ng ; fi'
arm was W .
aW W at?W I quietly arose from here, and went
quietly to hi s is th is indeed the
turban brought by you mi'
rrqm‘
?w m rfi fiwrafi ?why,R amrao, how do you feel to
-day The following are a fever
M arathi expletives ; am ; am fi ll; 515 , m a: 3 5 W ,
3 11171 , &c . Sometimes whole sentences are thus inserted; 3 1m“ W il l
'and what shelLB saay W fi fl
‘
f" m may God,
bless you, &c. Some of the expleti ves have, it must be con
fessed, a force and meaning whi ch . other words have not,
and wi thout them the M arathi language would be ' deprived
of not a li ttle of its idiomatic vigour audi gmce, ,as i s i llus
trated in the above sentences with em ,one
’s-own.
208 m s uni ons or nasarut.«ll 0
3
05
he
PA R T I I .
CH A PTER XXI .
DER IVA T ION .
The Ori gin and Composi tion of the M arathi
Language.
3 6 1 38 1 .
The H indus of the higher classes or castes are
denom inated A ryas (nobles, but etymolog ically culti vators ), a
name which is also g iven to many other races whose ancient
languages, li teratures, and relig ions are analogous to those of
the H indus . A s the majority of the A ryan nati ons i nhabit
Europe and India,they are also designated Indo-European
or Indo-Germanic races .
3 62. The Indo-European races are the Greeks, the
R omans,the Celts
,the T eutons, the Sclavones, the Persians,
and the H indus. T hey are descended from one common stock,
and thei r languages coinci de chiefly i n regard to vocables o f a
purely private or domestic nature.
Nolan—“ Ir is precisely those words and elements which are the
most pr imitive, the most fundamental. and the most essential parts
of each language which they have in common. I mean, fi rst, those
words wh ich express the natural relations of father,mother, &c.
,and
k indred generally ,secondly, the pronouns thirdly, the preposi tions
and particles ; fourthly, the words eitpressing number and fi fthly,
the forms of inflection.-Dr . M m
’
r.
3 63 . The vocables of the di fferent A ryan languages
difier i n form,but the ir identi ty of orig in can be easi ly traced.
Thei r variations are such as can be accounted for by sup
posi ng such causes for them as caprice, alteration i s physical
ci rcumstances, differences of educati on, and varieties in the
organs of speech,which are peculiar to different races . The
following letters are exclus ively peculiar to Sanskrit the
palatalsq, 5 , a , gr, 3 1 , and {r the linguals Z , 3 , if, e, and l it;
210 m s carom or M AR ATH I . 3 6 5— 4
twice
dédfm to g ive
burden to bear
zddan to beget
bzidcm to be
I think
3 65. Sanskrit is regarded as the oldest of the A ryan
languages, and exists in i ts primitive form in the Vedas,the
oldest li terary books of the H indus . It continued as the
li terary as well as the popular language of the H indu A ryans,
who were emigrants from Central A sia, up to about 900 B .c. ,
after which i t ceased to be their vernacular,although i t con
tinned to be sedulously cultivated for all the higher purposes
of literature and relig ion . For popular purposes the A ryans
used several new dialects which had sprung up among them
by a mixture of their own language with those of the abori ~
g ines among whom they had settled. The popular dialects
were denominated Prékri t.
Note. T he word prakrita came from prakriti procreative
nature, and means deri ved, the several Prakri ta dialects being
regarded as derivati ves of Sanskri t ei ther directly or mediately . The
original language from which a her springs i s called p rak p ti or
sound. Thus,H eme. Chundra says, Prakrit has i ts origi n in
Sanskrit that wh ich is derived, or comes from the latter, is called
Prakri ta. T he expressions Sanskritand Prakri t are opposed to each
other in another sense, when the former word denotes men of culti
vated minds,and the latter those who are uncultivated. The term
Prakrit i s therefore also applied to vulgar and provincial forms of
speech.
’— Lassen
Note — In the Sanskri t dramas that are extant, the women and
servants are represented as conversing in the Prakrit, whi le the
priests, the k i ngs, and other persons of rank and education in the
Sanskri t . T he changes which Sanskri t vocables, as well as i nflections,
have undergone in the Prakrit, are such as would be effected by
i lli terate people using the learned language . Thus, stri became
3 69 J rns carom or M A RATH I. 21 1
{sin} rakta became rakat, and kshatriya became khalriya, khi ttia,or chhattayu .
”
3 66 . Vararuchi , the author of the oldest and most autho
ri tat ive g rammar of the Prakri ts,mentions four dialects,
among which he as signs the foremost place to M aharashtri ,the immediate source of M arathi . It is par excellence the
Prakr it, and he devotes to i t nine chapters out of the twelve
into which his book i s divided.
3 6 7. T he four Prakri t dialects mentioned by Vararuchi
are distinguished by the names of the provinces in which theyare said to have flourished. The M aizéréahtri was current in
M aharashtra the/
M rigctdhi , in M agadha, the modern Bahar
the Sauraseni in Sf] rasena, the reg ion round about M athura
and the Pai s'
échi was the language of the P isachas,barbarous
hi l l-tribes .
3 68. Sanskr it words underwent the following changes
i n the Przi kri ts
I — T/ze Vowel Changes.
3 69 . l . T he Prékri ts usually retain all the vowels, except
i t, i ts as, at , I?and ad.
(a) in“ is changed to fl , as
first! a debt, Pr. Rw, M . {for but
i f the are i s combined wi th a consonant, i t is changed to at , r
or s'
thus, Sk . E“?g rass, Pr. avr, M . 3 3 ; Sk . i t? sight, P r.
fi é‘
r, M . 6 ! Sk . 1 3 season, Pr . 3 1 .
(b) i; becomes 11 or an , rarely or i ; Sk . % FSTH , Pr. ararfirSk . an “
a demon, Pr. “ i t Sk . a? fate, Pr . 3rd or tea M .
ffar ham produced in S i ndh, Pr . W Sk . Q7} firmness,
Pr. if“ ; M . tfi'
l‘
.
(c) sais changed to 8h“
or are ; sometimes to a ; Sk .
flaws:youth, Pr . stra i t, M . 3 2m! Sk.tilt a citizen, Pr. vsfr,
M . W IT Sk . 3 31m welfare, Pr. f ree orW , M .m .
2. at i s sometimes changed to f , qand ai r:
(a ) Sk. in: cccked, Pr .m ,M . fi
’
fi'
, ripe.
Sk . and a fan ,Pr . W it ,
M . m , a fan.
Sk . W : a live coal, Pr . ffl é‘
r, M . m or i ffm'
.
TH E OR IG IN or M A R A TH I. 3 70
(b) Sk . m a bed, Pr . em , M . as .
Sk . I f? a creeper, Pr.m , M . i s .
(c) The i t becomes sit when followed by q; Sk . m salt,
Pr . an , M . firvrsaltuess in a soi l.
3 . A long vowel followed by a double letter is shortened
Sk . an}: a way , Pr. W fl'
, M . W a trace, track .
Sk . (hi : long , Pr. fi rst}.
Sk. gj’
, Pr. gear.
Nata— Sometimes the long vowel is retained,and the conjunct
simpli fied ; Sk . {mm a lord, P r. m i} or fa i l .
4 . A short vowel followed by a conjunct is sometimes
lengthened, and the conjunct simplified Sk . finer a tongue ,
Pr . fi lm,M . i f” .
5 . The short vowels { and 3 ,followedby conjuncts, are usually
changed toQ and sirrespectively, retaining the conjunctsSk . fi ve: a lump Pr. fie
“
M . fie
Sk . W : red lead Pr . or fig: M . i f?Sk . W the face Pr. M . all“?
Sk . W a pearl Pr. 2m M . fiRfl'
II .— The S imple Consonants.
3 70. 6 . The sing le consonants tr, W, a,and at are usually
changed in the Prékri ts for the two sibi lants H is substi tuted ,Orfor a ,
and i f for at
Sk . W 3 a sound Pr. trait M . mSk . six : a eunuch
Sk . wit a river Pr.or!
“
Nata— A t Ratnagiri Hf is the word for aft, a river.
Sk . m glory P r. afi r
Sk . W : 8» demi-god Pr. m M W t! exceeding lyold and infi rm .
7 . The aspirates are changed to g
Sk . (In!a merchant P r. erg M . mSk . al to be P r. i t M . i t become thou
true calow or maaa'rm. 3 72
as Sk . belly, Pr. W , M . i i! si de of the body ;
Sk . h a field, Pr. 3 1 , M . W ; Sk . W a pond, Pr. m ,
M mm1 4 . (0) Of two dissimilar strong letters, the last displaces
the first
ear I'
8'
s“
t W
m orw = fl
w orw = r
W orm W
15 . The sibilants, combined with the weak le tters,
retain a place in the modified conjunct ; i n, W ,WT, W , “ 3 5 ,
a, &c. (a.
1 6 . (e) The weak letter in conjunction wi th i f i s some times
changed to the anusvar, and i t to H
Sk . an; a tear , Pr . ai d , M . sfiqSk . wfi'
a touch, Pr.m , M . sum-zit3 72. W e g ive below a few additional words to i llustrate
the above changes
Sanskri t. Prakri t.
afi respectable
5 37651 135a potter
superior, banker
geardrymt outside
em i t: oxen
£ 501 : a pi llar
W a temple
(arm a place
fi rst turmeric
§ 373 ] rue omen: or xanarat . 215
W :darkness
swan self, nom sing. arm , awn arm a father
a: who fi t
W to speak film?!in: ripe fi ifl
‘
fi'
5 3 73 . Not onlv Sanskri t words, but the i nflections also
undefi vent changes in the Prakrit
Declension of the noun Buddha.
S i ngular . l '
al
Sanskri t . Prakrit. . Sanskri t.
l . 3 3 : m2. m m3 are: are
th 6th4 . i
Sa
én
azeas e
Si ,“Same as the 6th
a 3
1 3 3 3 .or safer si s
Conjugation of the verb 3 5 to
A CTIVE CONJUGA T ION .
Present Tense.
S ingu lar P lural.
Sanskr i t. Sanskrit.
1: serfs
2. («is
IM PER A T IVE M oon.
224 m s omens or manual. 3 8 1
Adj ecti ve m lubricous, slack ;m oi ly ;gar im
potent.
Verb gas“ to slip suddenly ;3 6858 3 ; to crawl about gas
!wlfifi i to besmear with grease.
A dverb 3353 65 or art continually dripping .
5 . Or m s A NYA-DESA J Cmss.
R oot A r. m a horse-shoe.
Deri vati ves.
m m .,m a shoer of horses ;“ f , a sort of palkh i
m m . , a set of horse-shoes w e?f . , the pri ce for shoeing
a horse m a horse-shoe nai l ; m a fami l iar term
for the bearer of a particular pole in the Mohurrum .
R oot Pers . fifi lfi t temper, fastidiousness .
Deri vatives .
Adjecti ve m — tfi ,m fastidious.
3 8] The various elements which enter into the com
posi tion of M arathi have each its peculiar use . The Im ita
tive Particles and the Désaj words occur chiefly in the speech
of the lower classes, and give their thoughts and feelings a.
bodi ly form and expression . The Tadbhdvas are employed by
the hi gher classes for all popular purposes, while the Tatsamas
enter copiously into their formal and learned di scourse .
The Anya-Desi languages (the A rabic and Persian, through
the Urdu ) contribute a large number of valuable vocables
relating to the arts and insti tutions of civi lized li fe, and impart
to the language into which they are incorporated, singular li fe
and energy . When a formal discourse of a secular nature i s to
be sustained wi th courtesy and digni ty, or a manly passion to
be expressed with vehemence, Urdu words and phrases a
freely used by the M arathis . It is no exaggeration to say that
Urdu i s pre—eminentlya k ingly language . Its phraseology has a
dignity and a majesty, and, wi thal, a fire and energy that no
other Indian vernacular possesses . Born and cradled in the
camp, i t has always continued to be the language of the Court
and the camp, communlcating i ts manly force and vigour to
383 ] m u ral Damvsrrou 227
CH A PTER XXI .
TH E PR INCIPLES or M A RATH l DER IVA T ION .
see— s4 3 1 .
382. A ll the Maréthi words which cannot be traced to a
simpler form in the language, no matter what be the orig inal
language from which they are derived, whether Sanskri t,
Prakri t, A rabic, Persian, or English, may be denominated
M arathi roots. 3 79
383 . New words are formed from the M arathi roots in
the following seven ways
(1 ) By modifying the radical vowels or consonants : l'hsl
’fi to
bind ; t iara dam ; t han a shape fi an an eye ;m an eyelet or
a little hole ;Wfi to fall qrfi to fell wai t to tear
W to tear (trans .
(2) By modifying both the radical vowels and consonants
325i to get loose, unloose ; dig it to loose.
(3 ) By joining letters or particles either before or after a
word : gfi to break 3 1 + unbroken (m anger
m + §z = trlfiz passionate . The particle before a word i s
called a prefix (awa i t), and the particle after i t,a suffix (m ) .
(4 ) By doubling the simple word qfi grain,«at? grain, &c.
(5 ) By uni ting two words to express one notion, both words
retaining a place in the compound :w black and afar a cat
= anm iat a polecat.
(6 ) By the union of two words so that one of the words i s
somewhat lost as oi l and (wi ll water= fiwrvfl Sl im: sour and
m smell = sfiw rm
(7) By the union of two words, whi ch, without entering into
formal composition, express one simple idea : as gram an
assistant .
Note.— In formal composi tion the inflections indicating the relation
existing between the two uni ting words are dropped :m m a
king’
s house , (m m a palace am ?are?red earth J in an-fl red
earth. The genitive Q T of am and f of m are omi tted 1n the
compoundsm andm .
230 l lABA 'l‘B l nsaxva'nou. 3 93
3 9 l The causative an is assumed by some intransitive
verbs, chiefly the neuters, after they have by a change of their
radical form become transi tive actives ; the formmade up with
the an then becomes strictly causative ; thuS, 1 15i to graze.
1 11 i to feed, and unfi t to cause to feed.
3 92. The radi cal changes of form which the intrans itive
neuter verbs undergo are of two k inds ; lst, they lengthen their
initial vowel, as 'R i to fall, intransi ti ve (111 i to fell, transi ti ve ;and 2ndly, they both lengthen the i ni tial vowel, as well as
change a radical consonant, as firei to get loose, intransi ti ve
h i to loose, transi tive. We give below some M arathi verbs
ofboth these k inds
l The verbs that lengthen only the in itial vowel
Intransi ti ve. Causative.
M to drop m i te strain 3113 173!to cause to strain
qfi to graze 1 11 i to feed fl rl'fi to cause to feed
anti to pass by assetto remove 3 76 7 ? to cause to remove
at”? to float , or be saved art i‘t to save strait to cause to save
«i i to be crushed m i to crush (N ari to cause to crush
vi i to fall magi to fell m i to cause to fell
Infill to die qrt i to k i ll qrrzri to cause to k i ll
(H i to remove {mi to remove m i to causeto remove
2. The verbs that modi fy both the initial vowel and the
radical consonant
Int'ransi tive. Transi ti ve. Causative.
gz'i to break zil
'
a'
i to break a’
nzi to cause to break
We i to get loose fin i to loose i mri to cause to loose
szi to break m i to break mi n i to cause to break
ga'
i to get loose thei rto loose “ Hi to cause to loose
393 . The grammatical construction ofthe causal derivatives
di fi ers according to their orig in .
1 . When the orig inal verb i s transitive, i ts subject i s put i n theinstrumental case governed by the postposition ari a, and
another subject i s used wi th i ts causal form (H T W term?Rama eats bread ; Cans . H
‘i Irm a W M , I cause
399] M AaA rm namm rlon. 23 1?
Rama to eat bread. In the causal sentence, tmr is put in the
instrumental case governed by m , and separated from all
direct control upon the causal verb,and a foreign agent i s
introduced as the direct subject of the verb.
Note — In Sanskrit, also, the subject of the simple verb becomes in
strumental when theverb assumes the causal form; trfii un i mRamaabandons hi s wi fe Causal-fl i t! W W ( He makes
Ramaabandon his wi fe.
2. When the original verb i s intransi tive, i ts subject ismade the object, ei ther accusative or dative, of i ts causal form ,
and a foreign agent i s introduced as the di rect subject of the
causal form; as trfl‘rfirm?Rama sleeps; Cans.
"El?(marfifi rfi fir
he causes R ama to sleep .
3 94 . In both the causal constructionsforeign directagencyis implied, but the addi tional idea of indi rect agency i s neces
sarily implied only when the orig inal verb is transitive, notwhen
it is intransi tive .
3 95 . The A nomalous Verbs are like the intransitives in
regard to their causal construction as (Ti rrm R ama learns
Cans. i ii mm fi lm he teaches R ama.
3 96 . The i dea of indi rect ag ency can be expressed by the
causal forms of the Intransitive and A nomalous Verbs by joining an addi tional at to them E lli (mm W WHe got Rama seated by Ra i ; Wfi
'
m m wHe caused Rama to be taught by H ari .
397 . When an additional er i s joined to the causal forms of
the simple transi tives, they become double causatives wfi i«ri m W mm W got
himpuni shed by the teacher through hi s father.
3 98. The causal verbs, no matter what be their derivation,orconstructi on, are all transi tives, and can be conjugatedregularly in the Second Conjugation. (Sect. 220.
II .— The Potential Verb.
399. T he Potential Verb expresses the abi li ty of the
M A RA TH I DER IVATION . 405
3 :bad W a bad deed m a had thought.
Far a long time ;m for a long time ;m a daughter.
3g, had a badquality W evi l practices.
=rnot m an atheist.
W various mm various.
fit into, downwards fl i rt conducting firm fallen down;
m absorbed in .
firz, fi g, Emwithout fi fi'
cfl' blameless ;fimwn:formless.
qt another m a stranger M . vrnhranother vi llage.
tm' back, away w having the face turned back ;mdefeat.
qfi ' round vi a? walking roundabout.
m after W N W repentance.
gar again gai n!regeneration m a remarriage .
wasseparately ;m separation 3 7461 13 various,manifo1d.
trbefore IQ! the being before, a lord ;wra‘a mini ster.
qfi t back, again m : a reflected beam sugar a reply.
was out i fu'
l‘t adultery .
firapart Fai r?!disjo ining , separation fi rm!a widow.
a wi th R afi ! having li fe “ If?!of the same caste.
at!good M a good action m a virtuous person.
{11 together wi th i t'
l l? going with, a junction (li qa con
nection .
at with , together with m intercourse.
a well as ? good-look ing gru nt a good thought.
at one’s own ;wfi r a native country a s]? one
’s own
intellect.
a i rof one’
s self, spontaneously w i self-exi stent “ W
the choosing of a husband.
II . P refixes .
405 . Elm P . deficient ;am'
cfit weak .
§ 407] M ABA‘I’BI naarva
'
rlos . 235
311 (A s ) other m a misunderstanding ;fim i expenses
in an improper way .
Qt , Qt H . each m every month mm dai ly .
a‘r A . not m or a
‘disapproved W efl
'
eminate .
i t“ P . before, a leader m Peshwa.
n P . bad m a bad deed m m adj . infamous.
fiw H . without m 1 ; wi thout a mistake Fmwi thout opposition.
i P . without firm without remedy i f!“ shapeless,
clumsy .
m: H . head W the head Subhédar.
Surmxns.
§ 406 . The suffixes used in M arathi are more numerous
than the prefixes, and are derived from various languages.
They are divided into three classes, according to thei r origin
SA N SKR IT , M asi rni andUsp u.
I .-Sanskrtt S ufi e:
A bstract N ouns.
407. Sanskri t words assume the suffixes at, a , and a to
make up abstract nouns, and these particles are affixed to
nouns as well as adjectives . The abstract nouns formed wi th at
are feminine, and those ending in a and a are neuter. When
a word i s modified by a“
, i ts ini tial vowel i s di splaced by a
gfi vowel or proper diphthong 18
first sub. a fri end fi l‘
fi fll‘or orM friendship.
gt: adj . heavy m or far, orW heaviness.
{I adj . hard fear, m , or (rai l hardness.
m (sub. ) a Brahman ;m a'
ror ( i f, orm Brahmani sm.
Nata— The abstract nouns, derived in the above manner, are used
inM arathi poetry to denote an idea of plurality or multitude as an
a town, m a multi tude of towns than a field,m a number of
fields thus, for instance, in the following linem means amulti tude
of people
23 6 sw arm DER IVAT ION . [ 6 408
"ftm m , m ,m a?!mm.— M oropant.
A djectives .
4 08 . By aflixing at , t , I t, Erma, W : adjectives are deriv
ed from nouns, to denote pertai ni ng to. When afli xi ng these
particles, the following radical changes take place i n the
noun
1 . T he final 3 , s. or i i?i s changed to 811 .
2. T he final a ,an, 1
‘or i
" is dropped.
3 . The ini tial double letter i s dissolved, and the fi rst conso
nan t, i f originally uni ted wi th It, assumes'
Q'
, and i f united
with q. assumes Si t.
4 . The init ial letter, i f not a conjunct containing a or tr,
is displaced by i ts correspondingW vowel.
at i f; a R ishi +w= >nffi a descendant of w; zrg Yadu,
W : 1 773 8 Vasishtha,m 8”
the son of Vasi shtha m the
wi fe ofDaéaratha,
the son of Sumi tra Lak shman
(Q'
)m k ing Daéaratba,m pertaining toDaéaratha,
his son; grewthe god Kr ishna, am
'
évrpertaining to Krishna .
at ) trfrthe R ishi Garga+q= mri the son of Garga (El?
the name of a g iant woman, $ 027 the ofispri ng of Diti m a
vi llage, W belong ing to a vi llage, W the palate, W
palatal.
(am ) ama R i shi ,W arm W the son ofKata .
(i l l ) HTE’
a brother+fa = ¥rrqh the son of a brother vi aa mountain
, WW mountainous .
Nofa — Some words do not lengthen the ini tial vowel when modi fi
ed hy the above suffixes ; was; a mountain, qi sflu pertaining to a
mountain H Q thee, fl aw relating to thee”
; sfm an end,
pertaining to an end ; fara'
tooth, i n; dental.
240 111111 11 11 1 1 nsnrvarlou. 4 1 1
all!become ;was becoming or consti tuting a vessel;mbecoming a trouble ;m becoming a reason or occasion.
A lso,“ become affected by,
”with the princi pal word modified
by i ;m i tt become, caused oroccasioned ;W W become,
proved or evidenced.
c trlike or resembling ; firm like a father. A lso, of the very
form and essence, composed of ; Erma-cw of the form of a
devi l,‘
fiendisb at “ like a man, human .
155-1 void, destitute of W destitute of wealth W
&c.
m bold ; eminent for somequali ties or works ;m ay: emi
nently liberal ;m ; (W t ;W alt ;m ar &c.
m that stands or rests ;W one who lives comfortably in
a house, hence a gentleman ; tm’rw a traveller ;m standing
in a vessel.
(a struck, destroyed Wai l?! deprived of life ;Wm ;fi tlfi fl,
(Hair850 .
gr, m ,m that seizes, carries ofl'
wara thief m ,
feast ; 3 3 5m“
M aairrm'
Surrrxas.
I -Narms .
1 . A bstract Nnuns.
4 1 1 . M arathi AbstractNouns are derived from adjectivesby affixing W and tron ; ari a had, mi n or or-vvn badness.
Those abstract nouns which end in W are neuter, and those in
W are masculine.
W hen the suffixes W andm are joined to adjectives end
ing in 811 , the an i s changed to It ; s lim good; wh en” or'qi tr
5mm goodness W honest, 313 1 11 or fi lrwrhonesty. alum is
changed, also, to wi ll? in the abstract noun m or
The sufi xes W and iron can be applied i ndi scrim inately to
every M arathi adjective, and,optionally, even to Sanskri t
adjectives ; as rm (S. ) cruel, h im , or fi nger or . .q-oucruelty.
4 1 4 ] M A R ATH I DER IVAT ION. 24 3
are: ah a bribe, S im a bribe-receiver alt a beating ,
m that constantly receives a beating .
W ;'fiZ the be llv,
'a’H t-t that stuffs h is belly .
I I [ . Verbs .
5 4 1 3 . A few verbs are deri ved in M arathi from nouns and
adjectives in the following manner
1 . A great many nouns and adjectives are converted into
verbs by affixing the gerundial terminati onUr as azar pain,
5155?to pain m a dirty. 35 55 25?to get dirty .
If the noun or the adjective ends in 3a , the err is dropped
beforeaffixingn:m , a flap, {1111361 todespatch arm"naked,
m afiato strip {m a des ire, £ 1 5 3?to desire .
2. Some verbs are derived from nouns and adjectives byadding unfi t:may a man,m to become human ;aarmad
,m at to become mad fir? a belly, W to clamp to the
belly .
Vote — Very valuable verbs are derived bv adding 312!0 1‘
III .
— H 1Nnusmm S UFFIXES .
I . A bstract N ouns .
4 1 4 . m i ; star honest, staff honesty ; i t! hold,
boldness .
W warm,11W 0 1
‘“ W T?or arlfrwarmth.
arm fi le sweet, fitara sweetness .
ness ak a a friend aka?friendshi p .
Ifi'
;aiara slave . i a'fl’
SLI V108 W E T a pass, tflfi tfi sending
off.
2. Nouns of A gency.
(tilt P W unjust,mafi’
I’
t a wicked doer .
at P afi a a saddle , PM a saddler.
weapons M an offence,m an ofi ender.
art P . ;as!a province, W the head of a province .
m a horse-shoe, arai ia farrier.
3 . Nouns denoti ng ofi ce,condi tion
, c3c.
i ;m a. banker, FI NE?money-chang ing .
firfi W a slave, granted slavery .
(Ni ; i f“ a blackguard,W blackguardism .
4 . Nouns denoti ng place or receptacle.
ant P . gas a flower, W a garden.
ara or M ;m a pen, m fi‘
ra box for holding a pen
W a rose, W a. vessel for holding rose-water.
aura an t a g rave, i i i?“ a grave-yard.
strawP . ;fiat Hyder, §a1 1a|a the ci ty of Hyder, or of liars .
W EMT work, am t a factory .
I I — A dj ectives.
Denoting fa ll of or aboundi ng .
si rH . 31355 hunger, gramhungry .
i ;mart a bazaar, alarfrpertaining to a bazaar .
an:P . m faith, {W fai thful .
111 ;w as sense, m afia sensible .
W si ft streng th, afi’
t‘
rat strong .
II1 — R ednpli cati ves .
4-1 5 . The R eduplicatives are made up by doubling th e
original word : tffa'
ra stone , duplicated form, Gift“ stone s
and all other such things ; m fl‘
aren‘t bread, &c.
These words are formed for the purpose of i ntensi fying the
meani ng, or making the word more imi tative. They may be
regarded as a species of the Copulative Compounds .
246 M A R A'
I‘H I DER IVA T ION . § 4 20
(a) It may denote individuals of a gronp or class separately,
fi rst ; house and house . mafia , m , mmm ,
&c. aw are?“ Ivar aim?we fl ew?I v i si ted
every house separately, but nobody gave me anyth i ng m0
W W m Sufi every man i s by nature di fferent, tmfi
m gm R ama searched every tree separately aiéa afi i
elf?ain'
t take out every mango separately from thi s .
(b) I t may separate a group of indvi duals from other i n
divi duals fli t i m am the women were s i tt ing
there by themselves ; 31mm i fi m?atri a only the brothers
have separated;m EM“
? i f? only the Brahmans had met,
not the other castes . A djectives may be simi larly employed ; a“
M afi m m vfiv fim fiw m mfirm am {mmm of the people that are assembled all those that are whi te
are English, and those that are black are Abyssinians .
(0) Sometimes the reduplicative has only an i ntensive
force W FRET W gm then she persp ired fearfully an?
an“
? M EFF»? he reduced him to extreme di stress an
M 37W aflfi'
fi r he ti red the horse so much that i t
frothed terribly ; wfi 5735“ he cut him to pieces ;
5 1mm fi aqfi zaraffi rm the dress was torn to shreds .
(d It expresses measure or standard di s lribntively aura“
film Eli as arm"?he di stributed the rice, g iving a p ai li
to each ; firfi za‘
i'
z m 3 é‘
frér he steals cloth each time of
the measure of a finger’s breadth .
(e) The reduplicative may be extended indefin i telv to
convey an addi ti onal intensi ty of mean ing ; qr qr qr;
fists”? a?i n i n i nm m.
rmrm rm rmwe}armm .
In this way any other parts of speech may be redupl icated.
n a n n reaeh e ia eh aia
4 20. 3 . Sometimes a letter i s inserted in the reduplicative .
(a ) T he privative vowel 3? may be inserted to express a
di fference or an alternative W WI? worthy and unworthy
§ 4 20 M ABA‘I‘H I DERW AT ION . 24 7
W right and wrong “ mama fit to eat and otherwise ;
m strai t?!all— both worthy and unworthy
had come . Sometimes the privative particlea is inserted ; safer
a'
l'fm i t is or i t is not ; W t?! i t i s or it is not— mgumeut ;
strai tmmM N H ?M anu re meet fi at , W 3: m are
“ Tell, you had an argument wi th him yesterday and what was
decided at last T hese are purely Sanskri t formations.
M arathi equivalents are (fai r yes or no 53?Eat, i ? 3173 7, &c.
(b) m i s inserted to express the sense ofpromi scuous action
carri ed on vigorously ;W a vigorous stri k ing wi th
slippers among indiv iduals united in a mass wi thout 0 1 der
m : the j oining of many things or by many persons ;
Grimm acti ve and bur1 ied pack ing up of many things 0 1 bymany persons . The final vowel of the redupl icative may bl
displaced bv i’ warm-aft, warm?
(c) 33?may be 1nse1 ced to express the sense of uni versalO
aty ; m he went to every town and village (a t
«a?takes the locative termination
(d) a may be inse1 ted to denote the sense o f abundance.
W w ww you see any amount of houses even
where a 3 1TH?am a? "take now any amount of money .
(e) The geni tive term ination 5 T may be introduced to
express the idea of abundance or complet ion fi rifi l'
rhl' m
writ (fi t the whole village had come to see
.
it ; Far?m
m many armies perished in that war.
(f ) The letter =rmay be i nserted to express the sense of
completi on. W W W gas-(3m I paid every pice of hi s
(9 ) i f i s introduced in the reduplicative, the second mem
ber being a word of a simi lar sound to express the i dea of
daring ,or firm resolution ; fl i t Eh? the head or the
bundle, having the force of the English equivalent by hook
or by crook .
”
248 M ABAT H I DER IVA TION . § 4 21
(h) an; is introduced to express the sense of eve ryother are SIN are every other year flare a"; Qqqeve ryother day at m at every other house m1 gjq
'qia' mg 3 17 3
m t hat? every other tree in the hedge is a Babbool tr e e .
(i ) wi t-r is i nserted to express the following ideas :
1 . S uperior “ St i ff fl i t i fi ri of all the c i t i e s
Bombay is the bes t.
2. S imi lari ty :d?W 'fi'
l‘
3 1W”!fffl'
l’fl fin" he is like a ch i ld
among children,and an adult among adults.
3 . In addition to ; besides— indicating multiplicati on o r
succession i n a se1 ies : 65min aim mti aim do not orde 1
wo1 k on work (ariag:13!sorrow on sorrow; Infra (awexpen se
on expense .
(j ) The first member i s put in the dative case to expre ss
s imi lari ty, or equa li ty m an" “arm 517 3 1“ fag
-a; 3 53? ;fi fi g}
when I fi nd a horse exactly like mi ne, I shall harnes s
a pai r ;warmwari f? I wi ll take a rupee for a rupee .
(k) T he demonstrative air i s inserted for emphas i zi ng the
inherent nature or character of the person or th ing denoted by
the fi rst member ; an a} an , aura?m:afi'rvrm'
r who can
equal one who is a real father ga'
rfi gai ;raga raga.
4 21 . Imi tati ve particles are reduplicated, and nouns
are formed, as aria“
, making m a"
bother.
R edupli cati ve Adjecti ves .
4 22. A djectival redupli catives are produced in the following ways
4 23 . I . The A djective i s simply repeated, or a word of
s imi lar import i s joined to i t ;w e 0 1 aft eram very red,
li t. red red ;mfi n si t-r3 27W arm m his end 1s qui te near ;m very whi te at: very sweet milk . These £0 1
mations
(l ) i ntensify the sense of the orig inal adjective .
(2) They may express gradual progression ; W 2IW E
W read a li ttle at a time ; m e?W e a?!the morning shadow becomes g 1 adually shorter.
250 11 11 1111 1 1 1 1 DER IVA T ION . 427
W ;W , etc.
'
1 hose words express comprehensivenoss.
(8) Sometimes the verb 1s simply doubledwi th i t substitut
ed for the initial syllable of the second member ;W ,
N M , N M etc. These express the sense of com
prehensiveness .
(4 ) Sometimes m i orW e!may be joined to the verb;W ;M ;ferment
-at.mam-( Gt eta — W i t intou
sifies the sign ification of the verb to which i t i s conjoined, or
simply serves as an expletive without any Special meaning .
Adverbi al R edupli catives .
§ 427. The A dverb may be simply doubled to intensify
its sense ;W W 1 1176?the pulse beats very slowly fi rmvrflh W arm , fat
-ti erW W some creatures move
very slowly and some very fast ; if? 3 1am arm-r he came
qui te close ; if?3m film i ti s" m 811? he has quite
recently commenced to come to me.
4 28. Sometimes some particle i s inserted between the two
members of the reduplicati ve W quite in the middle
m rather below or under ;arri‘
m tr immediately after or
behind ; 51m up to the mouth or brim — inserting sit;W
W or M face to face, front to front— inserting an.
4 29. The imi tative particles form many adverbial reduplica
tives W denoting sharp sound W t denoting the sound
of tearing or brushing along the ground W denoting the
sound emi tted by boi ling liquids .
4 30. When the nasalised an i s affixed to the reduplicative,
i ts sense i s intensified m , m ag i , iron-i etc.
4 3 1 . Sometimes both the numbers of the reduplicative are
modified by elf or an ntbtt i‘
,m ,m .
434 ] COM POUNDS. 251
CHAPTER XXII .
THE PR INCIPLES OF M A R A TH I DER IVA T ION
continued .
IV.-Compounds .
4 3 2 4 51 .
43 2. A compound i s a union of two distinct words,
e xpressing one i dea : as (w battle i f? a field tq'
gfq a
battle-fi eld.
4 3 3 . The elements which enter into composi tion may, or
may not, retain a place in the compound. Sometimes two or
more words may express one simple noti on, wi thoutformallyentering into composition . H ence there are three general
c lasses of compounds , viz. , the Obvious, the Obscure, and the
A pparent
l Obvi ous Compounds m a table for rolli ng out cakes
that} a cake a table .
2 . Obscure Compounds :m.
the smell of singed food
4 3 4 . None but words of cognate orig in should be com
bi nod,though there are not a few compounds in M arathi of
long established usage, which do not follow this rule
W strained through a cloth = m S . +1rrarM .
m ma cow’s mouth-a m M u tm S .
W a bondt i'
fl' S .
M a judge’s H .
Note.— l t may not be superfluous to add that valuable as composi
t ion i s in expressing our thoughts with brevity and vigour, i t is impos
s ible to condemn adequately the bad taste which would impose longcompounds, consisting of moreIthan two words,upon a popular dialect
.derived as i t is from Sanskri t and Prakrit. by a rigid process of elision .
Even Sanskri t, though i t is capable of stringing together hundreds of
s vllables into one monstrous word, does not quietly submit to such
pedantic concei t.
252 COM POUNDS . U 4 3 5
4 35 .T he M arathi compounds are ei ther of purely San s
kri t, or purely M arathi orig in . In compounds of Sansk r i t
orig in,two or more words may be combined, but i n tho se
derived from M arathi , only two words are uni ted
Sk . flarfi sm the H indu T riad m Fwy mm a school.
M . swim father and mother unfi t a householder.
4 36 . The compounds may be SUBSTA NT I VES, A nmc'
rrvns,
or A nvsass.
1 . T H E SUBSTA N T IVE COM POUNDS .
487 . In the substantive compound, (1 ) two words may
be put together, the former descr ibing or determining the
sense Of the latter ; or (2) two words may be put together
which are usually uni ted by the conjunction and These two
classes of substantive compounds are designated Determinati ve
and Copulati ve respectively
l . The Determz’
native Compound m m measuring byrule= 1fi rfi ffrfl 'fl.
2. The Copulative Compound W shawl and turban
(1 ) The Determi nati ve Compounds .
5 4 38. The qualifying or determini ng word in these com
pounds may be a noun , or an adjecti ve .
1 . When the determining word i s a noun, itmay indicate a
case-relation in reference to the noun which i t precedes, or i t
may be used apposi tionally.
The determ ining adjective may be either an adjective of
quali ty, or Of number .
H ence the determinative compounds are divided by the
Sanskrit grammarians into three classes. vi z. the Tatpurusb
(aim hi s man Karmadhémya Eli-51m and Dvigu (fi
‘
g'
two oxen
S 4 3 9. In the TatpwrushCompound, the fi rstwordexpresses
a case-relation as fi rst lit. thief-fearz m in: fear
254 communes . 4 4 1
being dropped and hence i t is not always easy to determine what
particular case relation is implied by the first word. T hus, the word
m a school= fi 1n knowledge 3 178 ! a place. may mean a
placefor knowledge. or a place of knowledge, or a place obtained byknowledge, or a place in which fi at or knowledge is communicated,
&c. , and it may therefore be a dative, a genitive, an i nstrumental or a
losstive Tatpurush compound.
Noun— Tho Karmadkdraya may be vi ewed also as a Tatp urush
m may mean knowledge which is like a treasure. or the treasure
of knowledge, or a treasure Obtained by knowledge. In the last two
senses, i t is Talpurush and in the fi rst Karmadhéraya.
Nola— In the Karmadbéraya as in the Tatpurusb, the first word
drops its inflections ; asm red tlrifi'
earth WNote.
— In the Sanskri t compounds introduced into M arathi the
first word of a Tatp urmh or Karmadlui raya, may come las t .-Tatp u
rush .om king of the geese, insteadofm ; so also wh o a
man like a lion, instead of (agar ; fi rm the fore part Of the nigh t ;
Karin. 13min the lowest King , W 318 the best Bharat.
(2) TThe Copulati ve Compound.
4 4 1 . The co-ordinate relation exi sting between twowords
i s usually indicatedby the conjuncti on an?! and, but when the
conjunction i s dropped, and the words are uni ted,they form
the copulati ve or 1‘s; compound ;ER
‘
a house QR“
a door =
are":house and other property sni'
imt parents .
Nata— In English the co-ordinate conjuncti on is not omi tted rice
and curry there is bread and butter for the children. InM ara
thi sometimes a fragment Ofm and exists i n a copulative redu
pl icati ve ;W e?F'
fi fl'
or fé sfi'qfi '
sfi every shred of a rag .
4 4 2. The reduplicative Compounds, which fall under the
class of the Copulatives, are considered i n detail under the
R eduplicatives. 4 1 5 )
2. TH E A DJECT IVE COM POUND.
4 4 3 . When the wlzole compo und i s used predicatively of a
s ubject, i t is called an A djective Compound, or agents Pos
sessing much rice film having the face of a horse fi fi l’
l‘
£ 5awai t!(Wall theKi unarswere beingswi th the faces ofhorses .
4 47 OoMPOUNDs. 255
4 4 4 . The Bahum'i hi i s usually derived from a substantive
compound. In fact, when a substantive compound is used ad~
jectively or predicatively, it becomes Bahuvrihi Karma .
arm eyes like a lotus Baku. m u lotus-eyed”
a?m
W m ? have you seen that lotus-eyed woman 3 57qfi t"!m ,
firm mfi a cock i s abiped, not aquadruped stalk?
i gnorant Tatpurushm an elephant’s head Baku. tram?
the elephant-headed.
4 4 5 . The Bahuvrihi i s usually derived in M arathi from the
substantive compounds , by a modification Of their final vowel .
1 . If the final vowel i s u ,the w i s changed to?orw in the
Bahuvrihi flag a” four faces, wgi efl
' four-faced ;W mcrooked-necked = = qfamfl m ;W tWO-tongued ; 6 1 3mlong
-nosed. If the final word i s of Sanskri t ori gin, the or i s
superseded by i ;m fragrance, W e?fragrant. Sometimes
the at may not be changed as singlet horse-faced.
2. Sometimes the genitive termination Erri s affixed to the
compound R andi boldness in an assembly , attra‘
afi'
ar having
boldness in an assembly.
3 . W ords Of Sanskri t derivation afii x an and otherparticles ;
firm causing bi le One produced in the egg {mar
produced from a lotus.
4 4 6 . The Bahuvr ihi compound stands for the objectwhi ch i t descr ibes
,and suggests i t. T hus, 1mfi =rthe elephant
headed, could be used predicatively , as a?1mm an? he i s
elephant-headed
,or i t could stand for the person usually des
cri bedor suggested by i t, i . e. , forW itt who i s elephant-headed.
A lso Ph at"?long-cared i s ei ther an adjective, or a noun denot
i ng an ass,the animal possessed of long ears. The Engli sh
equivalents are left-handed,” high
-minded, &c.
3 . T H E A DVERBIAL COM POUND.
4 4 7 . In the A vyayi bhaoa or A dverbial Compounds, the
fi rst word i s an adverbial parti cle , and the second usually a
substantive, the whole being used adverbially W e! every
day= qr fem «i ts dai ly .
266 nun s or oosooananos . § 4 68
Nata— Nevertheless words are made emphatic chiefly by the tone
in which thev are uttered, seldom or never by any grammatical con
struction.
§ 4 68. The M arathi sentences, of whatever nature, whe
ther assertive, interrogative, imperative, or exclamatory are
constructed in a uni form way, the distinction between them
being denoted simply by the tone of the voice .
A sserti ve:amt m m H T?my sword 1s in the room .
Nata— In the interrogative sentence the interrogative particles or
words may or may not be employed.
1 . W hen the enquiry refers to the bare assertion or negation of
a fact or event,the i nterrogative sentence is generallv used wi thout any
interrogative particle Huffmm m an?I is my sword in the
room gi ft w i ll“
i n W ? are you his father warw e fi n“ ?
wil l i t rain to-day Optionally the interjectional particle am what?
may be put at the end of the sentence 3 11q 15q mar 3 113?m ?
are you his uncle m m 5512: will it rain
2. When the enqui ry refers to any other particular, such as the
name, place, time, manner, &0 , various interrogative words are always
employed to make up the interrogati ve sentence:W an m ?
what is your name, Sir . qi f? (nah where do you reside mm ?when did you come it th at?suffi ce who brought i t
4 69. The verb impli es action, and an action has an agent,
and i t may have also an object. Sect. 180.
§ 4 70. The M arathi verbs, together with their inflections, are
etymolog ically ei ther active or passi ve, and they consequentlyhave a tendency either to the subject or to the object
rm emit R ama eats ;m fi W ms? R am ate bread. The
etymologically passive particle arhas an affinity to the object.
4 7 1 . The passive ET ceases to beattracted tothe object, i f the
object i s i nflected— changed by a case-ending . It is then drawn
4 77 RULES or consouDA nos . 267
nei ther to the subject,nor to the object
,but takes a (1160t
course — i t assumes the neuter singular form, which i ndicates
indiflerence or neutrality . Sect. 210.
4 72. The verb may therefore be constructed so as to agree
wi th the subject, or the object, or wi th nei ther . H ence there are
three Constructi ons — the Subjective, the Objective, and the
Neuter— them ,the with and the ma. Sect.
4 73 . When the verb agrees witha noun, assuming its gen
der, number and person, the noun, whether the subjcet or the
objcet, ought to be in an uni nflected case. The uninflected case
of the subject i s the Nominati ve, and the uninflected case of the
object i s the A ccusati ve.
4 74 . In the Subjective construction, the subject is in the
Nomi nati ve case,and in the Objective construction, the object
is in the A ccusati ve case. Both these cases have uninflected
forms .
§ 4 75 . W hen the subject is inflected i t takes ei ther the
Instrumental, or the Dati ve case rmat? I did (ma-rW 3
Rama. is able to go .
4 76 . W hen the object i s inflected, i t takes only the Dati vecase tflfi ' W fl
'
fi'fi' he caught the thief.
T H E SUBJECT .
The Ki nds of 8 abjects .
4 77 . T H E SUBJECT M AY BE A woan,A Bs aAsE
, on A san
TENCE
A word aftmm? the river flows .
A phrase : h i“ inf
irm a?! mi l she did not escape
punishment ; WET affi rms W i t i s imperative
that I should obey my parents .
A sentence an?!ra ise s all-h rs car?it ire
-3:Qatari amt: 3e
i t is the part of a low man to laugh at any one for his bad
Clothes ;3 ii i -rgtfifi rH'
fl'ifl
'writat?ai rfi elds“ ?anti!Fm W
M whitm m M sari “ first wh at rm?having heard i t,Durgi wished that Nant mi ght praise her more than Bhag t
‘i for
her generosi ty, and her readi ness to confide in her.
268 RULES or CONCORDA NCE . 4 78
Note .—A phrase m m ) i s a combination ofwords
wi thout the fini te verb.
Nata — The finite verb (m orm m !) i s the form
of the verb limi ted by the gender, number and person of the subjector object .
4 78 . When a sentence i s usedas the subject, a demonstrative
pronoun li ke a thi s,i s inserted in apposi tion, wi th or wi thout
a noun afi fi fi . m m g€w N i gerat? i f W 3? how could you think that you should rather li sten
to that wicked woman than to your mother ?HT (“
R iga I!"vi al
m 5 1mm an? fi 'fi!’
Elf!3 11?i t i s true that there i s a wayto go to the mountain through this gate .
When the demonstrative i s employed by i tself for thi s pur
pose, i t i s always in the neut er singular but i f i t i s used wi th a
noun, i t agrees in gender and number wi th that noun, as i llus
trated in the above sentences .
4 7 9. T he noun sentence might be used after the verb
to be, as a nom inal predi cate 485 wi th as i n Eng
li sh gi ft “ 3 1 3 11?i f?w fi zrl'
éfi irqsfi i s i t your desire that
you should suffer the torments of hell In English the noun
sentence, as in the above sentence, i s c onstructed wi th the
impersonal phrase i s i t that,&c.
The Case of the Subject.
4 80. T H E SUBJECT OF TH E VERB 1s USUA LLY IN T H E No
M I N A TN E CA S E W ! W t gem an? Govind i s a good boy .
m m flirt 317 135 (Tathousands of people had assembled there .
T he subject in the nomi nati ve, or uni nflecfetl case, is called, by
way of distinction, the NOM IN A T IVE.
§ 4 81 . In the following instances the subject of the verb
does NOT take the Nominative Case
1 . When the transi ti ve verb is used i n the past tense, the
subject i s in the instrumental case ;m wfi at 33525'
the
robbers plundered h is house wri t am fimrffi l' he called me.
270 R ULES or ooucoanA Nos . 4 83
rl nsou fl ai rs W qfl frail fluff I went to hi s house
yesterday Ii El i I?awn:m whywi ll you not take it 3‘
WE?
gfiqm the chi ldren having seen that, began to cry ;
W W W we are poem m flm fiw m fi ‘fi fiwe shall all together g ive him a contr ibuti on .
1 . When an indivi dual i s spoken of respectfully , the noun
denoting the indi vidual IS considered to be 1n the plural num
ber, and the verb 1s accordingly put in the plural ,W W{fi
'
an?Gopalrév came downstai rs,anemi aW W
arm trra' warwe should go back as the lady mother bids us ;
W in-«W ?m 3 1133 W gar 17m ifi
' there was a gentle
man living ln A urangabad of the name of S ivarav.
Note.— T he singular noun of digni ty referring to females may be
Optionally pu t i n the neuter plural mime-a aura? in mi
fi g 3 113 the lady would have come,but was prevented mi , ing?
i i i ?3 3 “ mi madam, you are very considerate. T he neuter gender
is usually used i n the Konkan in speak ing of ladies of high rank ,
such as the wives of chiefs,kings, &c.
2. A noun of address i s followed by a verb i n the second
person, whether or not a second personal pronoun i s inserted
mi (TNT, arm i fi f rfitfi' 51857 slam?well, Rama, where did you
go to-day i
'
sT W “ i t“ , fl at? arm 35m R eva,come away
soon what are you doing there
N ote.— Persons of rank are addressed in the third person ,
and the
verb is constructed in the third plural {metres 3 76" gage mafia
a?m um lfi‘
ai m:si lk, I am W i ll ing to act as your honour may bid
me an an? tr !"frat well, where did your ladyship go
4 83 . T he subject of the verb 1s sometimes omi tted. I t
is omi tted in the following i nstances
W hen the verb is standanor impersonal ;m f ig-iam
qfi I feel si ck ish i t i s daybreak . The verb i s con
structed in the Bhave construction, called the Bhéva karts
-i tsin which the subject i s not strictly omi tted, but implied i n
the verb .
2 . When the subject of the verb denotes indefini tely, in thecondi tional clause, some one or somebody tanW.
"
i i i
4 84 Runes or GONconmuox. 27 1
M m M afi a wfi m m m who told you that
i f you went that way you would get ri d of your load mW W R W m t mi
d i f one sleeps on a damp
g round, he i s affected immediately wi th rheumati sm . The
verb i s constructed in the neuter singular .
3 . In the passive phrases, the subject understood beingthey a re N a]?m it is called a dictionary lit .
they call i t a dictionary 3 fl fi'm m Hflfifl fl
'
flfl' w
W first ?!mi m mi l! when such i s the case, why do
not they fi ll up this muddy place in the road cur trim aiTIN-l W m all things are sold in thi s town by weight .
305,
Nata — The Eng lish passive froms are usually expressed in the
above manner in M arathi ; the sentence is constructed in the ordinarv
way, the subject of the verb in the plural number only being omi tted
I t triqia 6755 ad “ RfW m people sell all things i n this
town by weight, which in the passive form would be expressed
wi thout the subject as, anwith H i ‘Wl‘lW m all things
are sold in this town bv wei ght. Such idi oms are found in many
European languages ; the i ndicative plural active being put im
personally for the passive verb. T hus. for instance,the following
Greek sentence: njv Wxfiv crov (irratroiio'w 81rd aov they requi re thy life
thy life is required. T he English“they
”
is impersonal . In
English the same idiom is semetimes used— they call him a gentleman,
for “ he is called a gentleman .
”
It i s also common in H ebrew.
484 . Sometimes the subject i s not omi tted, but used i n
the neuter singular, and the verb agrees with i t in gender
and number Thi s construction i s employed i n the followinginstances
1 . When the agent of an act is not known, or is supposed
to be unknown N i , 8!l QTEF affi ?eh, who i s calling out to
me h as; afiwflfirsta'
are?i tappears somebody i s sleepingthere ;ati n a?who comes there GEN?311 1 6 3 5 some humanbei ng i s coming .
2. When amost general statement i s made saw i ts} Wi m whosoever has eyes wi ll see ; W ET uni s; i? firmwhosoever understands wi ll teach.
272 RULES or OONOORDANCE. 4 85
3 . When the humble condition of a person is descri bed
with delicacy ;fi W m m W fi mares arm surely , Sir, that person who takes so much
pains to glean corn for food, must be poor. This construction
would not be used in reference to the happy or honourable
condition of a person ; i 1 3 3 !“m atw f ir eman 1 171?
one who feeds you must be superior to you .
4 85 . W H EN TH E SUBSTA NTIVE vans“TO BE 18 FOLLOW
ED BY A NOM INAL PREDICA TE, rr A GR EES W ITH rrs SUBJECT,A ND
NOT W IT H TH E NOM INA L P R EDICA TE ri m stairawait Sui
-tryon
are a very honest woman ai m m W ET suppose you
had become a boy ; ti W tramm a atri a you owe me fi ftyR upees.
N ote— When the verb “to be is constructed wi th a noun or an
adjective to make up the predicate, the noun or the adjective so uni tedis called the nomi nal p redicate, and the verb to be is denominated
the copula or link .
Note.— The verb “ to be when used as the Copula, may sometimes
be omi tted
I . I t is usuallv omitted in the interrogative sentence constructed
with the interrogative pronounaim sf; fl’l‘qm ?what is yournam e?
2. In answertoquestions like the above ; Sufi all! rim myname i s Gopal .
3 . In emphatic sentences ; i f ?15“ you are indeed foolish .
4 . In defini tions ;m um-s m antraga s: a dictionary is a
book containing a collection of words.
5. In proverbial expressions ; i fi'
tfiqfii t'
11m wherever there
i s a village there exists a ward occupied by the M ahars.
Nata — In negative sentences are?is equ ivalent to 3 4-3 173 , and theverb i s therefore inherent inma. In theKonkan ,however, arr
'
g‘
i s
added to are"
?to make up the form ofthep erfect defini te distinct from
thepast he did not come a?W ET awl" past ; he has not come fir
W W 3 11i“
,p erfect defi ni te .
Note.— Besides the verb to bewai f and i ts forms, some other verbs
have a Copulative force . T he verbevil to become is one of them ; i f?
m m be has become wise. The neuter passivesm to look ,
27 4 R ow s or CONCORDANCE. I: 48 6
fi elds ; at mg?m fi rm anti :m m m an: then we
should no more have had the winter and summer.
Sometimes, however, a plural verb may be used with the
plural of the appos itional demonstrative pronoun strai t I'
ll’
i'
lair“ 3"t w aft Q?i n?our cow,horse, and goat have died. Th i s
construction i s usually followed, when i t i s necessary to di rect
theattention to each of thenomi nati ves separately zamt vrfin} 81 3 ;
m W QW W m m m m for you wi ll fall
into a place which burnswi th fi re and brimstone ; mi , arfi'
,ai'
rtr
enfi rthat i W tfi fla the chief duty ofman i s the pursu i t of
rel igion, wealth, love, and salvation fi (“
a t5 13 er mqwrafl'
m Q?m W m her pleasing face and address speak
for her respectab ili ty .
4 . When the subjects are of di fferent persons, the verb in
the plural number, agrees, i n person, wi th the one in the fi rst
in preference to that in the second or third, and wi th the one
in the second in preference to that in the third
l st and 2ud persons 3 i arrffirfi nia l": that you and I shall
di stribute to them .
how happy my sister and I are.
2nd and 3rd persons é‘
ranffiri sm?i fiirsimi fir-Ii she andyouhad both come .
In such a construction the pronoun wi th which the verb
agrees is put last. If thi s order i s not observed an apposi tional
demonstrative may be inserted ; fit, 1 ,sufbr a? 3T?! a r
‘
w I ,
you and he shall go, or Sfi r3 11W ! such we, or sti r W W fig-a»
are?such we three persons shall go, may be said.
NUta — When the subjects are connected by a disj unctive conj ane
tion, the verb agrees w ith the nearest gtBR E T 3 8 0 sh aftW
qfi sum at ant i“
?am astray-é?are?if you or any other person should
come to our house, we would not act so.
492 J RULES or COitCOEDANCE. 275
T H E OBJECT .
The Case of the Object.
4 87 . The object is either in the zi t-cusative or the Dative
§ 4 88. When the object of the transitive verb denotes a
l ifeless thing ,i t is usually in the A ccusative case ; m (13?
m arm Raghu commi tted a shameful act yesterday
W fl lfi i f !are? at fi rst he ate the sweetmeat .
4 89 . When nouns denoting inanimate objects are emphasi zed,they may take the dative case :anWNW!"W t Eh
‘
ri l'
'fl
W hat shall I eat thi s rotten mango? H tFI GH T fl fi rst“ ?
how should th is world be managed In H indi the same
idiom i s used ; an W eft m he li fted up that stone (dati ve) .
490. W hen the object of a transi tive verb i s a person, i t
i s usually put i n the dative case writ (W ET ( ti -T he drove
away R ama .
4 9] If the person expressed by the object be represented
a s destitute of li fe, li berty, or power,
— in fact, reduced to the
condi tion of an i nanimate thing , the object i s then constructed
i n the accusative case ; 158 ,if?garQ
'
éh‘
{F ITW W come away ,
I wi ll show you a k ing— show someth ing like a picture
— a
new strange thing ; but am 3 1m"!{Tam “
am-T li ra"
come on,
we shall go and see the k ing . So also H’
N fi a t e mit wthe tiger ate ten men gm sti rrerwi llW W P W i ll
you look out a good servant and fetch him ?
Nata — N ouns denoting i rrational animals are usually put i n the
dative case ; q’
rsm'm (fit an bring the cat here ; nan m msmearfaqoflarg ramarea
'
s? a crow ate up your sparrow .
The personal pronouns of the l st and 2nd persons ,which express personali ty most emphat1cally, are always used
11 the dative in prose , though there occur numerous except ions in poetry ; gm afi flfi W ? Who told you w gm
‘i‘q
you yourself told me.
276 RULES or OONCORDANOE . 498
Note.— Some pure transitives may take either an accusative or a
dative object ; and when the action of the verb afl'
ects the object
qui te superfi ci ally, the dative object is used, but when the action
changes its vi tality or i ts essential state or form, the accusative is
used
(1 ) tufi 3 6 76 7 he struck the boy ;
a ll“
? {asW !he ki lled the boy .
(2) “ IT?W he caught the thief ;
mfi fi ll“ m he detected the thief.
(3 ) wfi “ If?“ I lfifi' he tied up the cow ;
uni mi ( th at?he fastened the cow which had broken loose .
Nata-When the noun is separated from the action of the verb by
i ts dative case-termination, i t assumes a character of independence
and dignity, but in the accusative, which is the most dependent case,
i t holds a positi on of absolute subjection.
The R elati on of the Obj ect to the Verb.
4 9 If the subject i s inflected, and the object i s unin
fiected, then only the verb agrees wi th the object. The verb
can never agree with the object, if the subject i s un infi ected
W WW (mi?Rama eats bread twfi m t tam? R ama ate
bread ; ( FIT “ TEE? terri er Rama will eat bread {F ifi W («i tR ama ought to eat bread ;m ar 3mm: (waft tnftfi
' R ama must
eat bread ;W or tram mart mm R ama can eat bread.
4 94 . Theverb can agree only wi th an uninflected or accu
sative object, never wi th an i nflected or dative one ; as tfi fi
awfilm the k ing gained a victory (T5?! (m m the
k ing robs h is subjects. In the former example the verb
agrees wi th the object, in the latter i t does not agree W ith i t.
Nata— The anomalous verbs, which are essentially reflexive, and
which,
therefore, usually take the subjective construction, maysometimes be used as pure transitives in the objective or neuter
construction, to express the complete subj ecti on of the object a a?mshe W0 11 the game ;a t?!H i t itan fi lm he won all the
marbles mm alarm the dog hi t him, butm m and}the dog bi t and chewed the stick .
278 RULES or OONCOBDANCE. 4 97
srram 3:e wast! i ta?Ri gawaft arm? should we abandon
all our relatives and world ly comforts? i i i? qri‘r, w i t. fifi,
W WW . s tatfi .wait,wi th“
,its Buff sm all
-frat as staffersag
-«r
i fi'
aff they had already p laced there grapes, lemons , shad
docks, pine-apples, pomegranates, plantains , figs, guavas, and
several other. such kinds of frui t ; mfi‘m , fira
'
r wrist g ar, t?
3 1e he brought stones, bricks and mortar.
Note.— 1 . When the objects are connected by a disjunctive conjunc
tion, the verb agrees only with the last word , fi'
a'qrqjt ai r[agarw i ll
garfl agranwriff, $ 311 1 { feral Ewen
“
you wi thheld her
basket because you could not get m oney or tobacco from her .
4 97 . The transi tive verb may take two objects in different
cases— one i n the A CCUSA T I VE, and the other in the DA T IVE case
(W i th?an:(N i a?g ive four R upees to ltfimj i . The accusative
object i s usually the direct (wean! orm ), and the dative,
the indi rect or personal orW E EK ) object.
4 98. T hat object is di rect wh ich i s immediately acted upon
by the verb, and 18 essenti al to comp lete i ts sense ,and that 18
i ndi rectwhich 1s acted upon by the verb remotely . The in
direct i s called a personal object, when i t denotes a person .
4 99 . It i s such verbs as express the idea ofg ivi ng, whether
real or imag inary, that take two such objects— accusative and
dative. T he noun denoting the thing g iven i s put in the
accusati ve case, and the noun denoting the person to whom
the th ing i s g iven i s put in the dative case tm3?H im SlimFear R ama gave a. mango to Sadu ; Eff?! WET Q
'
éh‘
fire
H ari told me a story ; flutter mam-arts m rwfi
‘
i as: amThe Guikawad M aharaj sent a present to the Queen.
Some more such verbs are 3111 13!to beg , fi fi fi' to teach
, M to
ask , etc . These verbs agree with the accusative object,and
not the dative ;arm writa?(“an firarfir'
e he taught h im all
the subjects .
Note.
— T he postposition qrffi'
and are often idiomaticallysubsti tuted for the dative termination ; imam aai ry tell i t to him;m m 3
“
g ive i t to him “ 3 3 1 55“
farm 3 11? he has been
sent to me.
505 BUL as or oosconmuos . 279
500. When the direct object denotes an acti on, thedative
supine is usually used ; If?ifm m he wishes to read
i t tflmum!fi rm-Ft she learns to wri te. The i nfinitive may,
also, in some cases, be used to express an action ; a]?i s: “ if?he desi res to come .
501 . T he dative supine may have i ts own object : i t 35'
fi a'
l’ m fi rarrfir he learns to recite poetry .
502. The dative supi ne and the present participle 1n aT or
am are used as the i ndirect object tocomplete the sense of thedi rect object whi ch 18 a noun or pronoun as fi lm Wfi fi fififi
‘they taught her towri te . They taught her
— what ?T o
wri tem 3 a nm mW mil-36 I saw R ama swimm ing .
1 . The verbs of authori ty, such as flffi to tell, fi‘m‘
ffi i to
teach, mafi a?to commmand, m at to i nfluence, &c ., take the
s upine as a complement or indirect object ;“
fare-r (
”f m
m I got him to do i t. In English the i nfi ni tive i s used
as the complement in such cases .
2. When what a person i s actually engaged in i s to be ex
pressed, the present participle in ai or aim alone is used as the
complement or indi rect object W mft'aifl'
rt zn' qrf'fi
'
t' I saw
h im beating fi at trraimW I heard her sing ing . The
verbsmg? to see, Q'
afi to hear, &c.,take thi s participial
complement .
503 . Sometimes the transi tive verb so acts upon the di rect
object that i t produces some change in i t, as when we say,
H e made the water wine . Such verbs are called facti ti veverbs . Some of the facti t ive verbs are to make, m
‘
fir to
say or call, 37115!to appoint, « fl at to understand or consider,
M ai to think .
504 . Factitive verbs take two objects— the one on which
the verb acts, and the other which results from that activi ty .
T he latter i s called the facti ti ve object.
505 . In Sanskri t both the objects are accusati ve, as i s the
case in Engli sh ; but i n M arath i one is accusative, and the
other,dative ; W WW (T i-IT $ 3 , the frogs made the
280 Bums or oosconm s cs . 506
ostrich king ; 117m m fin m I regard him as my
friend ;m tfi flw fi lm?I consider you to be my father .
The direct object in these examples is dative, and the indi
rect or facti tive, accusative .
§ 506 . The factitive verb agrees wi th i ts di rect object ,and if the direct object i s in the dative case, i t takes the
Neuter construction ; arid?mm W fl they made him a
servant .
Nata— It is certain that the verb i n such constructions“
ought to
be singular neuter as both the subject and the direct object are
inflected.
Note.
—The most satisfactory mode of determining the direct objectis to convert the active into the passive verb, and the object that becomes the subject of the passive verb is the direct object. The
passive of fl'
g'
i fi'
fi lm umas wouldbefirm arm (rmfirmhe“ the ostri ch was made king by the frogs, notM y (fi n
507 . The construction of the factitive verb may be modi
fied, and the verb then agrees wi th the facti tive object aria?
m m i'
ah'
376 1“
they made a slave of the k ing ; term?firm{i f}?35 3 they made i ron into gold. When the conversion of
l ifeless things i s spoken of, the idiom g iven last i s usually
followed .
508 . The accusative nounwhich forms
'
the facti tive object,may be substituted by an adjective ; fire
'
flffl'
f arm a? 375 the
people made him mad ;W § § aiqm airfi the prudent
ones ought to make those who are fooli sh wise .W hen an
adjective i s thus used as a factitive object, i t agrees in
gender and number with the direct object ; but i f the direct
object i s inflected, i .e. , i s i n the dative case, i t i s put in the
neuter singular as in the above examples . The adjectives his;
and first?!are neuter singular .
509 . When the di rect object denotes a lifeless thing , i t is
usually put in the accusative case, and then the facti ti ve adjoe
tive agrees wi th i t in gender and number aafi W M 556?
he made the wall black .
282 TH E A TTR IBUTE. 51 1
5 1 1 . The objective sentence usually reports the wor ds ofthe speaker. In M aréthi the words of the Speaker are simply
quoted, and introduced by such particles as aft, or followed bysuch‘words as st i r,
“
é, grog , &c. In Engli sh a different mode
of construction is followed. T he M arathi sentence, i f gfi' qt?
i i i-q511 3 i i?warm , li t.
“ he sai d to me, that I wi ll com e
to your house ,” would be rendered in English thus : he sai d to
me that he would come to my house . W e g ive below a few
more examples
(Eng .-Raghu said that he was going home, (M ar.
m m; as?If?an'
srrrfi , li t. R aghu said that,“ I am going home .
”
Eng .— I told h im that he was the man that I wished to
see (M ar. )fi aw attired?aft 5 211 113 81 113 1 arm a?{ isa-sir Fit
lit. I told him that,“
you are the man I wi sh to see .
(Eng . ) -You asked him where you went yesterday, (M ar . )
1 2W fi fl'
fi d if?i f 811 6 dfi l‘
, lit. you asked him tha t
where did I go yesterday
Direct (Eng . )— I said to h im,A re you a tailor?
”
(M ar. ) I f?
mmw as?(orN TaT Ti ffr‘fi'
SIT?“ Indi rect (Eng . )I ask ed him i f he were a tai lor .
CH A PTER XXV .
TH E A TTR IBUTE.
T he A dj ective.
5 1 2
51 2. T H E ADJECT IVE IS USED EITH ER BEFOR E A N OUN 'to
=
ouamrv rr, onarm s rr WIT H T H E vans TO BE”as A rasurcarxvn
ar-‘fl qfi m m learnedmen are respected i t«fitm enthe i s very k ind. In the first sentence the adjective is used
attributively (W ) , and i n the last, predicatively (fi r?fri
’m )513 . TH E ADJ ECT IVE AGREESW IT H T HE NOUN IT QUA LIFIESm
GENDER A ND NUMBER ; if?fi ner 3 11?he is good.
51 7 TH E A T T R IBUTE . 283
5 14 . The declinable adjective is i nflected to indicate i ts
ag reement in gender andnumber with the noun which i tqualifi es
,but not so the i ndeclinable (an aim an?(em W W
l iq-fit W wrfr R ama 1S indeed good, but not healthy W fi
5 15 . Thedeclinable adjective simply assumesm or (I before
an i nflected noun ; 'fi ( 6 i WW W?'
v'
l’
fi l I will not
then Speak wi th low people ; vi i-oar am at q
'
f-a {li tre-sit
an?I have fallen i nto your hands at the very outset. Of the
two forms, that in an i s preferable, but for the sake of variety,
both forms may sometimes be used mfi zqr ga‘ffi 3 11
-term
firm the fi rst day of school-holidays .
Nata — Sometimes the i ndeclinable adjective may be inflected for
the sake of emphasis (suits?era-an d? Irma?) mi
termar-ar ( helooks at him contemptuously ) O thou poor fellow !qm 7 m 1
GMT, 31 1 11 51 QTHT amfie 0 my worthy uncle, you wi ll really
pardon my faults? T he adjecti ves trfli rand {I s-qare inflected.
Note .-A singular noun of digni ty being used in the plural number,
the adjective quali fying i t assumes plural inflections fi rm era
{aft GOpalrao i s i ndeed honest E6m f latfi rst?!am this gentleman
i s the father of those two bovs.
51 6 . WH EN T H E ADJ ECT I VE I S USED A TT R I BUT IVELY T O 'rwo
O R M ORE NOUN S , IT A GR EES W ITH T H E N EA R EST :grain-maim
q ifi'
, Germs this good coat, turban andplaid m gfi'
a'
ai’rW
qtrefi (rift sm egma the beasts and birds Of that climate are foundhere; 3TW arrfi’r3 8mW 3 1 1?sure I like thi s goodboyand gi rl .
5 1 7 . WH EE TH E ADJ ECT IVE IS USED PR EDICAT IVELY TO TWO
O R M ORE NOUN S , IT FOLLOWS T H E R ULES OF CONCORDA NCE GIVENBELOW
1 . W hen both the nouns denote persons andare of the same
gender, the adjecti ve i s used in the plural number 1 strfbr i f
m M (TEN T?you and I are constant tenants of the forest.
But i f the subjects are of di fferent genders, the predicative
284 rue ATTRIBUTE. 5 18
adjective i s in the neuter plural :arm m 3m Sflf i i i?Wi n?! hi s father and mother are very good people .
2 . When the subjects denote inanimate objects, the predi
cativeadjective always agrees wi th the last mfi i firé.‘
“ If?! i f?
i n?m i ts head and beak were large ; Bfi'a' ffi fi é
‘m WW arm , amiw fi 'm’
v'r «i m am m m rm:
m the streams flow gently here and there, and make the
hi lls and low valleys look very green . The demonstrati ve
pronoun gr thi s, may be opti onally inserted i n the neuter
plumb fi fi m fi ‘fl fi fi fi sfl i fl .
§ 518 . Sometimes two or more adjectives may qualify a
noun a t W W a“
are are ‘Tl'
ffi ’ I saw a tall and thick tree ;
g affaW qrt'
r‘
lfi‘m'
fli i g'
i'
cfi there were only Old and torn
turbans there .
519 . When two or more adjectives are employed, th e
demonstrative pronoun BR IT such, i s elegantly inserted between
the adjectives and the noun they quali fy gar !W BR ITQ'
EF
W 3 1mm smi wara handsome and noble youth sudden
ly appeared on the spot W QIET IT $ 755? arm Q‘eh
‘
r
( tart arH am‘ii “ Ti?we are i n the company of a rude and im
pudent gentleman .
When the noun i s inflected, the demonstrative pronoun i s
often inserted in th i s way, and then the demonstrative alone i s
i nflected to agree wi th the noun, and not the adjectives, as i n
the second of the above examples.
5 520. T he adjective may be used as the object of a transitive verb : SEW Eff? ER? Fa; i f? 66 11? we Should not do
harm anybody , but only good.
W hen the decl inable adjective i s used by i tself as the object
of a transi tive verb, i t assumes i ts neuter S ingular form uran
rgfi'
H ifi'
rafi , (311?mi l“ we told him the truth, not untruth.
521 . W hen the declinable adjective i s used along with
another object, either a noun or pronoun, i t may be construct
ed in two ways
286 TH E ATTR IBUTE. 524i
P RINCIPA L NOUN DOES NOT INDICA T E ONE SINGLE 'OBJECT , BUT T H E
W H OLE CLA SS OR SPEC IES or T H A T OBJ ECT i ii a? gm m m511?he i s the wisest of all the boys, li terally, he than a l l th e
boys wise i s.
Note.
-When the compari son is only between two or more i nd i vi
dual objects, the comparison is said, in Engl ish, to be of the comp arati ve
degree, and when the comparison is between an object or Objec ts and
the whole class of those objects, i t is said to be of the sup erla tive
degree, and the two degrees together are called degrees of comp ar ison
W W W afii’:
Nata—T he Sanskri t particles of comparison are at and i n for the
comparative degree, and as and g“
,for the superlative as g
aa pure ,
3 0am:purer,w as“
purest. Even substantives are compared i n th is
way d }a woman, ti tan more of a woman a!a man, gram: a tho
rough man. In Persian the parti cles are at and afia, whi ch in
Z end the parent of Persian, are at andElm; 3 3 goOd, agar better, andaged]? best. The root of these particles of compari son is a to stepbeyond. In English Ht exists in the form of er, and g in that of est;
small,” “
small-er, small-est.
Nata — Though none of these particles are employed i n M arathia few Sankrit words expressive of the highestdegree ofquality are of
common use in the language Gi gi“
! excellent, van best,qffig ’ most
rel igious, fi g highest, i ts best , trfi rst. T he P ersian word 3 3 m:better is also naturalised in the language .
Note.—T he superlative i s sometimes made up without the superla
tive particles in the same way as in M i rathi bv means of the locative
case m m il?( t i t among poetical compositions theDrama is themost pleasant. Sometimes the geni tive is also used treri or Ifi
‘
g 5 merg aimthe black among the cows g ives the largestquanti ty of milk .
524 . The following other methods are,also, employed for
maki ng up the forms for the superlative deg ree
1 . The principal noun may be put in the locative case, governed by the postposi tion Sl i t-rorquit, insteadof in the ablative,inflected by F or 33 1i ; gras?sqi sqi a
'
fi'
a‘
ran?thi s i s the largestmango afimfi'
era aim“
fir{rerun he i s, indeed, of al l men thewi sest
528 TH E A TTBIBUTE. 28?
2. The superlative adverbs atfii‘
, 3 1m ?! extremely, aura?
utterly, &c. , may be joined to the adjective W arsmzfi‘m
garter ear? th at he took the smallest of the pi eces .
3 . The adjectives first great and H im good may be joinedto the adjective:surf-TESE Fifi Eli
'
fffwi llM rhe held a very
long rod i n his hand a} i nf g! an?he i s very wicked‘
é‘
rafra'
r
m m he looks a great liar;a'
i'
aim m 3 11?he i s a very
learned m :an?he i s a very wise man W C
fi W rm afli‘
our country i s very ferti le ei ther aim ,
Eva'
s? atri a you are very rude,very impudent .
4 . The adjective may be doubled, or another noun or adjective of cognate s igni ficati on joined to i t {fr arm “
are:1173 7 he
became very red or afasrGTE”mar, lit . , he became red red
or é‘
r arraysafar, li t. , he became red like the gm flower or
i f?m {178 1 he became of a bri ght, flaring red an?! di e
3512's flat errahis face has become very black, or coal
black wia'
t rEsra whi te white, very white or trimwhi te as crystal, extremely whi te .
N ote.— In the last three paragraphs the comparison i s not direct .
525 . EQUA L ITY BETWEEN OBJ ECT S IS DENOT ED BY TH E USE
or T H E DEM ONST RA T IVES man and gear SUBST ITUTED FOR TH E
POSTPOSIT ION {a or ah' m art {Gramm fi
'mi‘
r he looks as
young as myself gaff {aim'Ei
'
i'
aria i n“?the moon i s not so far
as the sun .
N ata — W denotes magnitude orquantity, and gain , both quan~
tity and number “ i f w it W “ ET?!I do not want so many
rupees man orW ?ma so much rice.
526 . Simi lari ty ofquali ties i s indicated by the words
«IE-tar, mm, fi rst like. &c 3“ e tfi qi ’rm mi ss:the: I
,li ke you, live here on the chari ty of others .
527 . A small degree of quality i s expressed by modifying the adjective by m or at {fr m or m M he
looked somewhat black or the adjective is modified by the
adverbsarr, fi rfiaq, SIRE . &c. :i i} arrSH EET an?he i s a little dark .
528. When an adjective quali fies a noun , expressing the
Sense of plurali ty, it i s usually repeated fi t36! 5751! SIT?
288 T H E A TTR IBUT E.
i h great men had come there m trifl e i f; or tiT-fi‘ that?
i f atria there are large houses i n that town garm wivFuTW WW 3mmm m you must have rece ived many
excellent presents . In M arathi as in the other Indian vernacu
lars, the adjective ofquali ty i s thus usually repeated, W hi le i n
Engli sh it i s used singly .
Nata — By affixingm the adjecti ve has the same sense that i t con
veys in i ts reduplicated form anm tfl‘zfi a
‘}or eff atri a.
529 . The reduplicated adjective expresses the following
addi ti onal senses
1 . It expresses the sense of the adjective di stri buti velg
«Tarqa; Ira:arts:W g ive a cake to each of them all ; a?
were trotm a m h'
that? they all ate , but each took
only a quarter of a cake .
2. I t expresses gradual progressi on W zf‘
ré"zfi
'
é"W read a
li ttle at a time m i ?M ami e Brings flit arrfi rEmm a-sit
all? Eli the shadow of the morning becomes g radually
shorter and that of the evening longer.
3 . It expresses i ntensi ty El?8578 are; gmr he became very
red ; 1 m 3 1?W W arrest his end i squ ite near.
530. A djectives of opposi te or cognate signi fication are
combined to express the sense of comprehens iveness : M i f?0
W rm:gem:(73!there were, including the young and old,
five thousand men present ; fi n?fi nal"
?staff 5 3; W udi
fi sfl‘he had i n hi s hand flowers— green, yellow, &c.
53 1 . W H EN A NOUN Is J OINED To A NOTH ER NOUN To EX
PLA IN OR ILLUST RA TE IT , IT Is SA ID To BE USED IN A rrosrrION, AND
T H E VER B AND TH E ADI ECT IVE A GREE W IT H TH E A P POSIT ION , AND
NOT W IT H TH E OR IGIN AL WOR D:a$ 3 6 (Tm , m , amfl i
’
,W H EN? gfi' ai l ffi fi at that time Ramrao, Krish
narao, and S i vi tribai , the chi ldren ofDavlatraiv, weret ere ;W
fl a m m aw m wfi flwm w further on I
met two persons, an old man auda boy;gi ft 3! 375g?fi tt'
wifl lr
W (fitN i 3‘
Ffi s‘
fit?m the i sland of Bombay was not so
large when i t was in the possession of the Portuguese. In the
290 rnouoUNs. 53 3
Neta — 1 . The editors of newspapers,representing the public, ha
bitually use the fi rst person plural zslnfl' bani}an?m fi '
ammuqnjq?1 1 76?m an?we hear that the Government has efl
'
ected the
transference of the maimlatdar. Publi c ofii cials in their offi cial charac
ter may use the plural number stuff a"m im fi ne"; atwe shall consider the petition of this prisoner.
Nata — 2. A person might , i f ofacknowledged dignity, use the first
person plural when speaking of himself airwi'a'
sli tqrfi I think so,
lit. , we thinks so sm i ‘
a"?W fl'
rfi I shall not be able to come.
Note.— 3 . W hen expressing displeasure at the conduct of another,
chi ldren,as well asgrown
-up pecple,sometimesassumeW W e ;fi H i
eff sflr81mm am are?sires ,eateramtm i ?i t i s all true, but I
cannot bear jesting ; what can I do to that Pand} 7176 M 51131!3 11 g ) away, I won
’t speak wi th you .
N ote.— 4 . A person might modestly use W for 31?”a ram
w 33 6 I lit. you and I shall think about it.
53 3 . IN A DDR ESSING A PER SON ,TH E SECOND PLUR A L roam Is
USUALLY USED :(the k ing says )'
é tfl‘affix?flit, W m i all” W i th
gfi W 23: iron «rift I have g iven this to you which i s but
li ttle ; I believe i t i s not enough to afford you complete relief;
an?as!" zirtvwrmgrwar fi sh me r. m m {can mi ?ai l-mm firg
‘fa‘
f afi'
gfi fl at ali'
fi'
a' I am very much gratifi ed at
your goodness, madam . What are your wishes ? What can
I do for your pleasure
1 . In addressing i nfer iors, such as chi ldren, younger rela
tives, menials, crim inals , &c. , the second si ngu lar i s used : (to
the page ) fi li f, 3 8 hm ENTER W 3 § ifl 3fl im i th fi mifl' fi at 3128 ,
aim Eff?wt no, there i s no occasion for it your
mother wi ll come to you, she wi ll meet you only here. H ave
patience for a moment.
Nata — l . But the children of persons of equal or superior stationmay be adressed in the plural numbermmm 3 1m m i chfld
do you want this sweetmeat?Servants always use the plural form.
Note.—2 . Equals , fri ends and relatives
,might use the singular
number to one another, i f the degree of familiari ty between them
admi ts of i t.
534 J raoNouus. 29 1
2 . BUT A LL om ens, or wnsravaa STAT ION m ar MAY nu,
SH OULD Br A DDRESSED rN'rnr sm ear. Nunssa. T he king thus
addresses the page’s brother, who i s an officer in the army :an
m , ariami Good morning, sir ; please walk in qui t thi s ?W “ If“!a?at i t? your father was a man of grea
t
integri ty and courage .
N ata — l . When the king is displeased with the same ofii cer and
regards h im as a criminal, he uses the singular number w mm a r W art . were? m w m a
‘firm fi delim
your sword over to Dalpatrzi v. Put h im inprison for a month. In
the following sentence the plural pronominal form (W ) with the
honorific subjunctive i s used sarcasti cally : smri “
l " (W. mm you may go now, sir, to your pri son.
N ote.—2. The singularmay sometimes beused instead of the plural
i n exci ted moments of tenderness. The king changes the plural to
the singular when addressing the page’
s mother, being very much
affected by her tender language :Wmfl ,Ii m {m m i t
wei r; 3 3 , W {m 0 my mother do not thou gi ve me so much re
spect . A rise and stand up . The mother i s usually addressed by the
natives in the singular number, but the father, in the plural .
N ote.— 3 . In addressing the Deity the singular number . i s used
31 7 , Hf!”m m m 81m 0 God, thou only art my Saviour .
534 . In addressing one’s ownmasters and persons of dig
ni ty, as well as equals who are Spoken to in a formal way, the
reflexive pronoun W i s substi tuted for the second person
plural m ini s saverarm was sure?W sir, we are
delighted at your magnanimity . W i th straw in the nominativecase
,the verb is in the second person plural, as withW .
A sti ll more poli te form of address would be with such
honorific expressions asm , (Tar, H ermi e, m , &c. , used
in the place of smrwand gtfl‘constructed wi th the verb in the
thi rd person plural . This i s a most i ndi rect, and therefore a
most respectful mode of address . Thus,
the schoolmaster,
speak ing to the king ,says) :wrfl fi flTW ?!W {I W W I
Should do what would please your M ajesty the squi re i s thusaddressed W m m wrs
’
i afi i m w m afi wW I wi ll tell it to you that your honour may know that I
292 PRONOUNS . 53 4
amqui te helpless in thi s matter ; 1m:Pram affirmW3 W (waft(Tm I am behind the time ofpayment a few days, and you,
sir, mi ght therefore be annoyed.
Obs.
— In English, though titles are substi tuted for the second per
sonal pronoun in addressing superiors, the pronoun is not entirely
dispensed with the honorific nouns are joined to the genitive of the
pronoun as your excellency, your honour, &c. InM arath i the forms
of direct address are entirely rejected a t (”fi g (m array
w whitm i l ri ffsm erg as I said to myself that perhaps
your honourwas annoyed and therefore you sent back the horse .
N ata — In more familiar intercourse,or in moments of strong emo
tion, the simple gi ftyou might be used instead of armor, or the
honorific expressions . The page’
s mother,when overpowered with a
sense of grati tude andaffection for the king’smost wonderful kindness
to her andher son, thus addresses the king :W m W fi fi mfl W W W W W WfiHI $ 311 1 wi ll ever pray to God
that he may ever bless such as are li ke you, generous and kind to the
poor. So also the old beggar when blessing the squi re uses the
singular number :m gm atgfl’
(raj?may God bless you.
N ote.— In addressing persons by name, the names of males should
be used wi th the honorific suffixes (TH . (W i ll, i t, li st, QT, a'
rsi’
t, &c. ,
and the names of females with aft, mi ,&c. thusW m or sfl
'
tn
arm-sitw m Gopalrzi v, where are you going? T he form
M is more respectful than that in rm. The “
i f: and at are often
assumed by those who are not Brahmans,though GT is freely applied
to the names of the populargods , as (1 31m the god Khandobzi , M ar
the god V ithobzi . Brahmans chiefly takeq’a ,
unless they have stu
di ed any of the Shastl as, or are offi ciat ing as priests , amt'
ta Keropant
(a 800018 1‘ Brahman) ; l TW l’
Gfl R am S i stri (a Brahman versed m the
Sastras) ;W OT QM M ahadeva bhat (a Brahman priest) .
N ata — The forms of names are sometimes modified when the
honorific suffixes are used {fig aman’
s name in i ts simple form, being
changed tow as . Ni s an . {figs fim . tfismfi ft so also (EL
RaghuQ , Ud‘ia tum . (fi rst. tres s, ( gam rgamrra,Sw
Obs ,
— T he safest course for the Engli shman to follow in this mat
ter is the following— A n Engli shman may be called by (1 ) his Chr is
tian name, or by 2 his su rname,or by 3 hi s surname wi th M r.
prefixed, or (4 ) addressed as sir, di e. T he M ar.’
1thi simple name with
294 PaoNoUNs. 53 6
53 6 . When the personal pronouns take inflected nouns inapposi tion, they usuallyassume their crude
-forms :m m‘1?m m M ?what canwe say about us peasants
?W 1TN
{airmen mi you ought to give a gift to me, a poorman ;glr'q
m {155 W m tiff?what, persons like you to
come to the house of us poor people
The fi rst and second personal pronouns assume their instru
mental forms, and not their crude forms, before names i n the
i nstrumental case : W TWWW lF‘EIfi 'm Eat
“
fire mfimal'l'
sum?mfi mg?unfi ? when I , the lord of the village, asked a
thing of him,should he have refused to give i t to me 2 gm
(mi-fitW art: at you, gentlemen, Should not act so.
Nola— When the noun i s uninflected,the pronouns are also unin
flected tfi at}:m aré'
am“
?what can I , poor man, do P
The Indefini te Personal Pronomi e.
53 7 . arm andm : are substituted for all the personal
pronouns (Sect. W NW “!13m aria 'Il'B‘l W
m he having kept me outsi de , sat i nside talking away
lei surely arrai 3 1m arm awri’
r what shall we do now?arm?m m , at m fi
‘
afivfi' waif? If I should serve him, then
who Should look after my affai rs ?
53 9. They have usually a reflexive force, and are used to
emphasize the personal pronouns : If?m : it 355"I myself did
i t;gartamerfi ifi where can you yourself see?
53 9. W is always substituted for the personal pronouns,
when they referto the subject of the sentence, and not otherwise.
The Engli sh sentence— “ I wi ll remain in my own house”
wi ll be
in M arathi , tfi‘w e !" (notmm ) aria ( raw; they have gone
i n their own boat ; 3 m ean (notwh en ) afi afi atri a he
has robbed h imself , W orm? wqfi ’c’e.
§ 540. W i s not substituted for the personal pronouns
though they may refer to the subject if theyform a partofthe subject;thus, R ama andhiswi fe came yesterday from Puna,
W arner M amas? ( not smrfl arm mrre m ama.
54 5 PRON OUNS . 295
Ifm was put for tar-fl ,
i t would mean not Rama’
swife but
that of the person speaking . But rm 3 111 151m W 35TH
W W ET R ama tak ing hi s wife wi th him came yesterdayfrom P una i s correct ; slum
“?m ay) 53 71 forms a di stinct clause
by i tself, in which the pronoun i s joined to the object .
54 1 . W hen the personal pronouns do not refer to the sub
jcet, they cannot be substituted by 81m I wi ll go to his
vi llage , a?W stiff arti st ; you Should not take my book , 1ari i gm i ts? air. But you went to your own vi llage
”
would be nota n )tri'
zfi"m .
54 2. The reduplicative form armatwm each his own, i s di s
tributi ve'
fiw as?gsaéi’
; i tem SITE? they came, each bring ing
hi s own books Gala answer?greet emf-ears; all like their own
doing s .
The form arm or w ill amongst (our-yourtheir) selves, i s used to express mutual relation gaffm in
i f? can"
you divide i t among yourselves ;'
a‘
rsrrtmia'vi i-es
“
: they
quarrelled among themselves ,
544 . W may be substituted for 3 111 3?in the fo llowingSpecial senses
(l ) A . person may speak of himself in a. style of digni ty,
and then use either staff or swim in the plural number for him
self ; srrqwsrfi Gr i m?our honour or majesty thinks so.
(2) It may be substi tuted for em i t we, i n the sense of
I together wi th others”
strawGWEN fi fl t 1 63?“
atan? we
you and I Shall do the whole day whatever we like stn orr
fi ts-ia stra
' W armor3 11i“ we four are invi ted to-day to
dinner.
(3 ) A’
person, when speak ing modestly to another of his
intention or abi li ty to do a certain thing , may use arm for i f
I,in the sense of I and you
—g iving thus the person
addressed the pleasure of feeling that the matter under cousi
deration cannot be performed without his assi stance : srrqq
W W as'
t'
: I (li terally“
you and I”
) wi ll consider i t .
54 5 . W may be substi tuted for gas? when a person i s
addressed most respectfully ; 81W"!warwe Rt 3 11 1?m
296 PRONOUNS . I: 54 6
If your honour wi ll order me,I shall bring and show i t to you .
W hen Speaking courteously to a gentleman armor i s alway s
used, unless the honorific phrases “ w ri t ,etc . , are used .
(Sect.
54-6 . W may be substi tuted for the third personal pronoun ,
in the sense of they when speak ing of an absent person in a
reverential style ;W W a556”
I shall do what h i s
H ighness or H onour wi ll order.
54 7 . m i s erroneously used for s-trqq‘; tfi m m (for
W ) W 3 1rd?(Ti t I have come to see your H onour.
54 8 . strum i s used often as an expletive; tfi'
W WW 3 3 851”
dfm M 6113 315?I just got up from here and went
straight to his house .
Nata — T he H industhani pronominal form 01W self, is sometimes
used amt gri t tfl'
l'
r3 13?all are well i f self be well. It is, however,
often used in compounds in the sense of our,one
’
s own W byone
’
s own hand m gqfi’fi'
of hi s own wi ll W wilful pranks
-1 (q,-qafi voluntari ly; of one
’
s self.
Note.-T he formations antlerarmorand arm-111 W are adverbial,
and denote of one s accord of i tself“
éW eir“ !fi qfi i it
got out of i tself staff ar‘
lott =rama’
r i tw arm!armfi ‘mrfi
m Ga ff at last before any one called out to them, they of them
selves, got up qui te exci ted.
Neta — 3 1W i s another adverbial form having the same sense
am m 53 8 It wi ll get loose of itself, spontaneously. The i dea of
spontanei ty is expressed, also, by joining the pluperfect participleWto sm ut; i f?3 1
‘
t si tarhe came of hi s own accord. It maymean also p ersonally .
3 . The R elative Pronoun.
54 9 . The relative i s used to introduce an attributive clause
which describes or explains the noun , called its antecedent
firaga r“ rim sum firm-aira?Fi fi afi s‘ta
'irrw Stri f how nu
fortunate i s that man who disobeys his parents . T H E A N'I'Ecn
DENT Is J OIN ED TO TH E RELAT IVE, A S IN TH E ABOVE EXAM PLE
agent man, i s joined to fi rwho, i n313 82: the man who, literallywho man .
”
554 J PRONOUNS. 299
chari ot that was gi lt, that was but recently made, and which
cost me two thousand rupees In thi s sentence the noun m is
followed first by a prepositional attributive phrase, next by a
part icipal one , and lastly by a relative clause. A gain , ramami farcfi , Garnet?! m , mm m m m u, m‘
ln‘H rhow just and contented he was i n hi s di sposi tion, whose
valour was like the valour of a l ion ,and meekness li ke that of
the lamb T hi s i s a most peculiar construction, and the re
lat ive clause i s most elegantly used.
fi fmfl r flt m w’
wfifi at «Farm 11
M oropant.
Nata — When the relative clause does not express the sense of an
apposi tional or attributive clause,i t should never be used after a com
plete sentence containing the antecedent. The relative clause is some
times used in English in th is way , but even in that language the rela
tive has, then, the force of a conj uncti on,and i s equivalent to and
who .
” In translating the conjunctional relative, the M arathi demon
strative fit is substituted for the relative pronoun . There was a young
woman there watching the field, who said,&c. ;Ri m N a' (EffM
W m am as a’
t (uot ail)m ; fl att en"
?i ts“ east.
{at}?(nota ct) awflqm a“?wi nWe“? her mother returned
home, and she inqu ired where Durga was ;'
ifi cannerfli t Eargri nzfl"first?“ there was a cave there
,in which I slept.
55 3 . T H E R ELA T IVE A GR EES W I T H T H E AN TECEDEN T IN GEN
DER A ND NUM BE R : i tw m if“ ? W whatever
injury was to be sustai ned has been borne ;a?film W3 11 3 1 written(itw m m:aft how miserable i s that man who
di sobeys his parents.
554 . W H EN TH E RELA TI VE Is FOLLOWED BY SEVER A L nouns,IT , LIKE TH E A DJ ECTIVE, AGREES W ITH T H E noun N EA REST IT:mum s
-sim i an , m ,
In ga, amm wwfi fitm that
which i s useful in imparting knowledge, as, for example, the
Scriptures, a letter, a messenger, a gui de, &c. ,is called an eye .
Sometimes, however, the relative may agree wi th the last
word in the sentence, particularly i f i t be the principal one
300 P RONOUNS . 555
neglecting the words nearest i t : em u; i fq'qtmfi , amma n QT? 3 M t! a goblet, cup, and other small drinki ng vesse ls
are called upupétra . The principal word stands, as i t were, i n
opposition to all the other antecedents , in the way i n which
the demonstrative 31 thi s, an "such, &c. , are used. 566 )
555. T he relative may be optionally omi tted :In?i a‘h sni ff
3'
s?Perry? smatte rf?a?1mm"?fi gs wri t: I wi ll take out what
ever old dresses I may have got in my box ; gai n?fi m trim’
fi farqz'fi i Q'
i fi "chi ldren shouldqui etly listen towhat thei r elders
tell them. In conversation the relati ve i s often dropped.
556 . The emphatic sense of the relative i s expressed by
repeating i t, or by uni ting afimfi wi th i t: 517“
i f?tun?if?in? {it a"?
or fit ant i }firm i s; ;whatever thing she asked we gave her
sh eta-oftfauna 3 178 ff! he thatbelieves shallbe saved. Th i s
emphatic sense may also be expressed by the omission of the
antecedent noun : s 8h 3 1 11 735"3 1am 3h
"
fi afi fii’
err? whatsoever
i s injurious has alone been forbidden us .
4 . The Demonstrati ve Pronouns .
557 . The demonstrative pronouns are a thi s, Efi'
that, star
such, etc.
558. The pronoun grthi s denotes something that i s (1 )
present, or near in place or time, or (2) something just mentioned, or (3 ) that i s just about to be mentioned ; aria?W i
m3 383? E 353 6 m when they heard thi s they were con
founded ;wta3 mariaarras?at W arm aamm w ewere?at a}W {Tammbut bear thi s in mind that i f the master of
the house had known i t beforehand, he would not have kept
sleeping .
g559. The pronoun a?that usually refers to a person or
thing previ ously menti oned ; mfifl 3‘m W m W TIT!
“
am when they heard that they were very angry a t RamrW i i?i f !m he got better from that time .
But i t is chiefly used in opposi tion to 31 this, or by way of
di stinction , and in such cases, 31 this generally refers to that
which i s nearer, and i i?that to what i s more remote ; STW ,
3 02 Prtorzonxs. 563
before the congregation ) Take thi s neut . sing . and eat
i t in remembrance of the Lord.
”
563 . But in a printed narrati ve, a sentence like thi s may
occur ;W trait tars?art-i fs an? m was , s
’
l can Harare:then
he pointed to the chai r and said, Take thi s (fem . ) for you tos it on . For, in a narrative both the noun and the demons
trative are uttered at once by the reader.
56 4 . T he demonstrative 3 1m such expresses k ind ; an"
amfi i’ what shall we do wi th such (women ) ?
565 . The Demonstrati ves follow the R ules of Concordance
g iven under the attributive A djectives . (Sect.
§ 566 . The demonstratives QT and SR "are often used
apposi tionally, and serve the following uses z
1 . grthis, i s often used i n apposi tion to the subject, whenthe nominal predicate defines or explains the latter : rm 3!
W m starRemewas the son of Gopalrav gar? i‘
W SITEBombay Is a ci ty .
2. grand am are usually inserted in apposi tion when the
verb has two or more subjects ( FITW 'fi'fi '
fl i at?!mfi éfi
‘both Ramaand Govindawent to see si ghts i t“
(ranm mW Q W m 3 11 i?fl? fi fi w further on I met two persons ,
an old man and a g i rl . Or they may be used when the subjecti s composed of two or more words :rfifi smé r $ 3 3 1135 a?Govind Sastri Lele had come .
Note .— amrexpresses kind or sort
,and 31 points out individuali ty .
W hen the demonstrative used in apposition is followed by another
noun, i t agrees wi th the latter . grfi rm 31m “ (if i f?!m (Ti t thatm m the happiness which we obtain at last from
the worshi p of God that alone 1 5 salvation. am m m mast , g
3 . T he appositional tr i s inflected instead of the nouns for
which i t stands W ,Ell
“
? “ If“!a? air:‘fll’
l‘
T W g ive grass to
the elephants , horses, and oxen (TNT,Wm m m afim an?Sakhi is cleverer than Rama, H éri , and Gopal .
568 Paononns. 303
4 . gr is i nserted in apposi tion when an adjective i s predi
cated of two or more nouns anti zfi i‘
i i i !fi fitfi éhfi hishead and beak were large , “
l
ift, stuf f “ If“!arm?8" firm “ QT
Uqram Gavri , M athuraand K55 1 m e very wi se .
5 . ( T or an" is also used , in apposi ti on, when a sentence,
used as the subject or object of the \erb, i s placed before It
{leftas gar t au a unti e as,swift a?meatmm chi ld, take
thi s, I have gi ven it to you for breakfast so say ing ,
he
walked away m M SITEm We? 3 1W “ If Eéfi 3 3 3?
affin i fl'
l‘fi , 3 W m F if i ? how can you say that
the m other of that woman i s not a bar, or that the g irl has
not to ld a falsehood m qm nfi‘, swu ng? Farm i i !"
35‘altarm atm 873 i t fitmafia mt?he does not cousi
der that some are obliged to beg by old age, sickness or mi s
fortune .
5 6 7 . The demonstrative used apposi tionally to nouns
agrees w i th those nouns in gender and
in? only the oxen and the buffaloes were there . Where
the nouns di ffer in gender, the demonstrative i s used i n the
neuterplural ;wfi sm‘l’
é ER“
, um, firs t, an?! arue‘t’
fl ags eras-fi r
he sold off hi s house, carriage, horse, and garden . If the appo
si ti onal demonstrative i s followed by a noun,i t agrees wi th
that noun,and not with those which precede i t W i-‘ffa r3a8i
smearright , aw n; auramt?am?mu“
?fi rst at that
time they took w1th them such weapons as muskets, swords
and shields.
568 . The demonstrative used apposi tionally to a sentence
i s always in the neuter singular, unless i t be followed by a.
noun,when i t ag reeswi th that noun fi i i‘afi flfi 3 171 86 5 1 17 {fi s t-fi
W fi w wm w fim mfi am?fire as.fi i
’
rarrsrraiar,sum wrfi where i t so happens that a person expects a favour
of us, and i t i s not in our power to confer i t on h im,there he
is to blame , not we . Instead of slzfi' fire we might simply
say 3 15:fi .
A lthough the demonstrative may be employed in apposi tion
to two or more clauses, i t i s always in the singular number ;
304 enormous. 569
i m garM .3 does it become you that you should laugh
at him,and that when he teases you you should beat him l
56 9. When attention is requi red to be directed to each
clause separately, the demonstrative a? that, in i ts neuter
singular form, is placed in apposition to each clause, and the
demonstrative neuter singular i f thi s, i s placed last, in apposi
tion to the whole sentence collectively, with or wi thout a noun
wfi m amwfits w sfi'
fi, ems“ M ummies! armm s. wri t
‘
a'
, t wh om!“ 0P § H § all thi s ) di mQ'
rm‘=rr€t he burnt hi s hair when letting off firework s he
broke the look ing-g lass that was i n the parlour he broke the
carriage did I not forg ive him all these faults
570. The demonstrative i f?i s usually substi tuted for the
third person but when two persons are metioned , gr i s used
for the nearer, and‘
éfi' for the more distant . Thus the English
sentence,“ let him go, and let thi s man remai n,
”would be
rendered EBfi ri r, gr(Ti t. In like manner, let him go, and
that man stay , would be QTwri t, i t 17 31 .
A s regards the rules on the employment of the demonstra
tive FR that, as a correlative, see the R elative Pronoun (§550
5. The Interrogati ve P ronoun .
5 7 l . The interrogative afi'vr refers both to persons and
things , but ch iefly to the former gaffa"?W e“ ?get} who is
your mother, chi ld afi’
rvrrarswwqthat 1?agai nst whom has
he commi tted an oflence get?grm afili'
a'i m fai rerafitvr
‘3
what i s your object in engag i ng in this business
When the agent .s unknown , the i nterrogative afi‘
rw i s used
wi th the neuter s ingular verb sf i t"! grewqfifi eh, who is
calling out to me
572. The form f rflrflror affrom'
ri s employedwhen inquiryrefers to one of a class of objects : 1mW 533 1 33W
i
which wi ll you take of these mangoes ash-arr Ha
‘
fi‘
gm (i firewh ich boy told you this story gaffer m m
w i ll i which of these horses do you want
306 raononns. 578
The sense of degree i s best expressed by faflfl'
tri whfi sf;
m fivwfim wfi m fwfl uvvwwfi W how poor
and dull i s the understanding of men, and how scanty and
imperfect thei r knowledge 1 axis“?nit Efiffl m fifi fi W
m an how strong do some Opinions appear to some people
6 . The Indefini te P ronoun .
578 . afiwas an i ndefinite pronoun sig ni fies some one 5
are?aftwwar3 113 some one has come downstairs . When the
person i squite unknown, the form fi n er; i s used 3 81”
3?t
marHrfiffii‘l‘ 3 11i some one,I do not know who, i s calli ng out to
you . afrvfi has the sense of any one fi rSfi Gl 'fi l'
W aimtell me when any one comes . an"!Q
‘
ar.’
expresses some parti en
lar person or thing , both s ingular and plural 3 1W 3 1W ( i f
i f“!Q'
EEW3 3 3 EM F.
“
Sui ? tod ay some people are going to come
to our house ; GEM Qflffi'
sfiq’
3 823: some one has sai d so a.
certain man has said so.
Nata — T he form afiflr (gal: has the form of the Engl ish indefin ite
article, and the indefini te phrase a certain,” which is often employed
in that language in commencing a story a'
r‘
rvrqéh'
flfi fi i fi' m83 62:{farthere was a certain man of the name of M aloji . T he ia
defini te numeralqar;has the same sense (gar; sqfir Qfifi fiarsfi W t
Ffifl'
éh'
fi fi at there was acertain very poorman of the name of Santéj i
are if?“ an? shire grog ears q% amt?firé‘
rmassifm 1 at a
certain time or on a oertam occasion, he felt very anxious as to how
he m ight feed them . qan' may also mean
“some one,
” uany one
Q'
a'
fl' 3 3 11 551 or ( E M T §W af Sharercall some doctor, any you may
find.
Nola — The M arath i noun has the forceof the Engli sh article inhe
rent in i t, and the context determines whether i t i s defini te or i nde
finite ;mfi I'
li’
awari f at last we have come to a town, or at last
we have come to the town (which we have been looking forward to)ai ran:warm i t must be a tiger atmm 376 arrar see, here the
ox comes .
579. affi rm as an indefini te pronoun answers to the question put with the i nterrogative afim r?f rom? a rm which one
shall I take A nswer, W ri t fi'
take any you please.
58 1 93 01100 113 . 307
580. m as an indefini te pronoun signifi ,‘n0 that which,
aft?some ,expresses a few, or a li ttle : swig
-I"aim-hr31?m i? some people think so ; rah 3 3 3?as; 551
-3? qrofl i f}?
there was some oi l and some water in i t.
amhas a parti ti ve sense wi ll?m W t W W fl'
I
W W (arm?he and his daughter ate some of the figs and
dri ed plantains from i t. It expresses, also, something more
or less, not noth ing aurasm W W I ,w (GIT do not go
wi thout taking any food ; eat something more or less . W i ththe negative particle i t signifies not at a ll : 3 857 aria?Wart?you shall not have anything at all.
It i s used when any matter or business i s Spoken of indefi
ni te ly g tgiqrqfi‘sniffw an?I have to Speak to you some
thing . Used adverbially i t expresses an indefini te deg ree
{cw grist 5573?W arr?the happiness obtained from
the possession of God i s something indescribably wonderful.
The phrase afii’
fi art-F f signifies by some means or other
3mm $ 6 ? Fri ll urn glare?you must by some means or
other supply my want .
The pronoun combined wi th Q'
afi' means some few per
sons or thing s . W m m wfi wfiaafl W E Hm fQW rimm q'ufia
'
there are some people of such a nature that they
must chew tobacco the whole day . W ith the negative parti cle
it denotes, not even one , noth ing at all ; harm ?aria?Q'
aw211?
W w flTfi’ the Pendha1 i s did dot leave a single vessel in
the house ; i f gm El'
i i‘
éi QT Hra I sha’nt g ive you
anythi ng at all .
when reduplicated has a di stributive force :afié‘
r’
Eh'
ffi'
i fi'
at?3 1723 ; 557 6?arts?31152 some fi elds here and there are good
some here and there are bad if fi at Efi'
ié'
l'
Efi'
iél‘W ?affi x,
art-é?SW? mat? thi spicture i s good m some parts , in others
i t is very bad.
308 THE cases . § 582
R eduplicated wi th “ a: i t expresses some li ttle degree :x i i i
“
IN?T 5 W ,W W m 3 113 I have purchased som e
little jagri , some l ittle more i s yet to be bought ; afiw Was soon as I took themedicine, some l it tle
efi ect began to show i tself.
582. Besides the senses of 11x one given under section 5 7 8 ,
it has the following
l . The numeral Ex is used indefini tely i ii?qx m mfrat some one person was standing there .
2. I t expresses the sense of one particularly or pre
eminently fir12x ’fi t an unri valled hero be ; i t {x fi x an
arrant scamp he .
3 . It may denote excess or continuousness ; qxM , there was a ceaseless wai l going on .
4 . It may mean one, alike or identical ; strai tqx we
are both one and the same .
5 . It may denote other, not the same 1’ Saw EEK, if Q3 ?thi s and that are different medicines .
6 . It maymean one,unchangeable gi ftzfl
‘
t , gfi m (175
smfi '
you are great, and your word ought never to change .
CH A PTER . XXVII .
TH E USES OF TH E CA SES .
1 . T H E NOM IN A T IVE CA SE.
ari as-war orm .
4 53 4 64 .
583 . T he Nominative is the case of the subject when the
verb tak es the Kartari construction 210 mm W ans,
3 1 13 1 an?my younger brother has come . I t i s also the case of
the nominal predicate Ingmar arr 331685? fix the father of
thi s boy was a weaver ; i wrr Wag
?GW EN?WM you are a very
honest woman .
3 1 4) was oases. 587
tions besides that of i nstrumental ity . T he following are a few
of them
2. The agent, or the subject of the verb ; fi at W W i fl‘
W fl ifil’
fla she told me that she would come?soon mW W W W i nfi zn
‘W affl e an?Godhas sen tus on earth to help one another.
«unit 3 3 .in frawas =rfitsfi — M or0pa lzt.
tam-as firstas,W e?aim fi rm-rfi .— M oropant.
N ata — The subject is alwavs in the instrumental case i n certain
i nstances.
3 . The operati ng cause or power : m a arrm fi h ’ Fi g-r
M antadied from that very di sgrace ,Sfi flr “ ri ft«raftm aft
t?m fill? g i mme {w e 3 1? W E STIR?atri a I am now con
vinced that they belong to some respectable fami ly, and have
been reduced to th is state by poverty .
ai mifi as sww gfi n M as ai ww — R amdas .
4 . M anner :W flfi fi fi w fiwm m m fi
they received them with g reat affection and meekness .
W 5 =I’ m fi WW W .
— M oropant.
5 . The accompanyi ng ci rcumstance W W HRTW RUTH?
Fi fi fi fl’m wear at that time Shi véj i attacked th e
M ahomedans w i th twelve thousand horsemen W aftera t
M ai ? fi ltm M ahomed penetrated into the Panjabwi th twenty thousand horse . T he i nstrumental termination
often assumes the form of h i t, as in the last example , to
express thi s sense ;W WW Waiv er; qria W S? Hi , we
should not go into the k i tchen with our clothes on,— lit . , wi th
our scarf and turban put on .
6 . The contents of a thing :31337? 32W“! W ?“NW NEEGT 617e “ Tr“!film ifir (TEEN 355W only there he took
out the scr ip fi lled w i th mo/zaras,wh ich he had tied round hi s
wai st,and empti ed i t before Davlatr
‘i v.
7 . A reference, i . e. , i t i s joined to nouns,adjectives, or
verbs, to po in t out in reference to what theyare to be understood:
“ ems?W TW eftwarfirst 3Tlf57 intrastate as w
587 T H E CA SES. 3 1 1
i fi l’ h is mother was not healthy in body, but she was beauti ful
a nd clever in housewifery m tram375 1 175”
W 5 i fi?the deer
w as bli nd of one eye .
m mm flffi'
(ari as staffmwasfirst hen— Tu itérdm .
8 . Space, proximi ty, (fire.
(a ) Near to, i n moti on lfl‘
W fiffii I wasquietly going along the road .
mutt frarmfi war I fagarrW itam .— Tukd;-(im.
(b) C lose to : fifi tartarm tfi'
ufi'fi '
she held h im to her bosom;
FIT ari a i i i?“ 3 3?BREE"? {ti ff therewere thornyt rees along both sides of the road by which he went.
(0 ) M otionfrom some?i tW armas:I went from Poona
t o Satara .
N ofa — When the 3 has an ablati ve force equivalent to from,
as i n the last instance, i t is always wri tten wi thout the anuswar .
9 . Intercourse, opposi tion, §‘c. tart?f i lm?m 3751} he
fou ght wi th him W i ttw ,w W i t 3 3 35
3 3 3 “ those who do not behave towards others wi th gentleness
and honour, are base .
mm Paw W amm rtfi'm — T ukérém.
1 0. Purpose emf? straw sm ut i t}? for our
ben efi t you must of necessity go .
T ime i f?m mm:wrflrW he died in two hours
wi th t tri er I T it BTW W’ii r — M ukteswar .
1 2. Di recti on , authori ty mtfi qm § em fi amfi fi tw as‘
fl fi fiftm then Sakhi remained there to wai t on M ani
w i th the permi ssion of Bhimébéi WW W fi fi rWard!he
was convicted by law ;m u n {flat i n his sight.
1 3 . Comparison :W a fi m éfi fiwfl W W Wsh"? tri m 3 133 31713 traffi m he compares hi s own condi ti on
w i th that of the other person , and fancying that he i s some
g reat man swells wi th pride.
1 4 . The measure of excess or inferi ori ty in compari son a?
i f?!Whfi fir?!he i s older by two years .
3 12 m s C Asss. 588
15 . R ate of in measurement andquanti ty lifi l’
lfi ‘m ,
w fi i‘h wri t he 89118 by seers, not by papali a (bushel s ) .
Obs .— T he English student should notice the prepositions wh i ch
express the different senses of the instrumental and all the oth er
followi ng cases. The senses of the M aréthi instrumental are expressed
in English by the prepositions by,” “ with,
” “against,
” “ in,” “
ac
cording to," “
along,”&c. No one who would speak M ari th i idi o
cmatically should neglect the chapters on the“ Uses of the Cases .
”
4 . T H E Darrvn Cass .
m or Hai ti
588. The dative primari ly denotes the person or thi ng
remotely connected wi th an acti on as i ts obj ect etymolog ically
i t signifies a gi vi ng, real or imag inary ; gt gra'
ri f Gm fi rfi a‘
alas-fiat thi s must be g iven to you as pocket-money WW
smarts gm act? srfa'
ai‘
ram“? 81e as Ganpatréo g ive s
much sweetmeat to the younger lads, and takes much for h im
self also . T he dative object is usually the i ndirect obj ect. Thedative case has several other senses . It signifies
2. The di rect object : Espri t lfl’
fl'
l'
t rare rufi éfi the elder Powzi r
holds him tfi'
flawai rwfi‘
g fii‘
, HG!mar gar are? father
does not know you so well as I k now you . When the objec ti s a person, the dative i s used as the direct object 4 90
3 . The subject wi th thep otenti al verb; sum afi'
rq'mw ard?we cannot do wi thout work ing ;M W 323 1
aren'
t W t =rr€ryou wi ll not be able to eat dry bread as she
does 4 81 ,
4 . The person or thing to whi ch an action refers, chi efly wi thintransi tive verbs i t?!53 5?if?) mi?an?rm m tre at} the
R an i became anxious when the two boys g rew up W i t
W W you appear to us very dreadful .
The following are a few particulars indicated by the dati ve
of reference
(a) Theperson or thi ng benefited or i njured 33W m
3m m in M t the patient recovered by the remedies that
were used ;w i t% m t GIF T?! 5 3 there are a thousand
3 14 T H E csss s. 589
b M otion to gm?gi tmu ffs saferfa rm-re smite othe r
boys would be promoted and rise to high appointments ti ltrim f’fm he has gone to town .
7 . T ime
a Poi nt of time In come to-morrow at fou r .
b Time indefini tely zama (T i ll? i f ?!m where we re
you last night
c Extent, limi t, (S‘e. arm cm; W em in i i satin-r
i t wi ll take two years more for hi m to return m i n a?atri a i t wants two minutes to ten .
Note-The dative “
H rindicates time defi ni tely, and G i ndefini tely ,
T he dative in a“ is never used to indicate a point or period of time
,
but only i ndefini le time i i fi i t shits-r, not fi fth acome exactly at
two o’
clock .
5 . T ar. A BLAT IVE CA SE.
(mm or frfl'
lfi ) .
589 . l T he ablative expresses the relation ofablation ,
i . e., of carryi ng away or tak ing away fin!" PM (
“aw
Wh i t-1!QT ?!W ET the fourth day T rimbakshet returned from the
vi llage i éflrsfl an?3m? fit?! we afi gram you are
lucky that you have at least escaped from the hands of such a
cruel g irl .
N ote.—T he postposi tions m , qrtfi'
etc . , are substituted for the
dative case-endings as more courteous forms M W 373 74 3
g ive i t to the gentleman is more courteous than m tr‘
i fiar3 3 73 3 .
In Engli sh the same idiom is sometimes used
Yet to the Generals voice they soon obeyed— Al ine) “
N0te.— The ablat ive termination 3 3 orm is affi xed either di rectly
to the noun, or to nouns governed by postposi tions;zi‘
masm(mail: an? Gopalzi rav came downstairs ; tif em? {fig {ti 3 5111?
W I am going to hear the whole story from hi s lips (In? WRh?qfitfi r he called out from insi de the house. The English“ from,
” -governing an adverb, is rendered in M arathi by W
“ from
above” m ; from here ma from inside W '
590 TH E cases . 3 1 5
Note .F ang? is generally used in the place of rd to denote the
sense of ablation ,expressed m
“
English by the preposition from :m
could have sufferedfrom h is pranks ,m m “
atri a all ? UP I"!to say that he would run away from the teacher. It 18 when motion
froma place is expressed that {a is usually joined to nouns denoting
place or location ; “ H Q? W he came from town. When moti on
Nata — (l ) Postpositions and adverbs, inflected by [a orW . when
expressing the sense of plurality, have a locative, and not ablative
force ;m m a;m ay R ’i Ri ft zifiré (fi t lights were hung both
insideandoutside the house ;my hm H i I "?m fififi everv
where trees only were visible .
2. Postposi tions inflected by am, when governing plural nouns,
convey the locati ve sense ; 3“q cams-aid?maize m e amwh en the merchants of Bombay brought only cotton in the shi ps ;
m w w as?the birds perched on the trees.
3 . T he postpositions, as well as adverbs, express the sense ofp eg
edge or channel , corresponding wi th through ; 3 117 3 i t came
by post. T he instrumental i i i s also used anam? i t go by thedoor.
(2) Another important meaning of the form Q3 i s than , and
it is chiefly used as a particle of compari son W m mn m fi tfi W m m m fi m m m mit appears from the very features of the g irl that she i s born to
live in a somewhat better condi tion than this
6 . T H E GEN IT IVE CA SE.
(W or We‘l . )
590. T he geni tive case expresses connection generally, or
the relati on of genus and species between two obj ects ; hence the
geni tive i s usually governed by a nounzfl ifl arm fi m 3!
am 3 173’ at ah fi rgrey itwritm i f I am in the slightest degree
to blame for it, then my condi tion shall be as distressful as
3 18 rue oases . 59 1
Note .— Thc noun
,as in the above phrase sin
s?ass, i s not usually
modified before assuming the gen itive termination 211 , when i t eXpress
es the sense of quality m t household, but m of the house .
The first i s an adjective, and the last is a genitive case ; 51t tfi l‘the
master or owner of the house, and M m is the same as qt iazfi
m fi householders, or persons living in the house ; an?!mfi‘
rafters
of the house, formmg a part of the house, but qfi aflfi household
rafters, in or somewhere near the house, but not forming any part of
the house . Sometimes another adjective mavbe derived from the same
root ;w golden, or ti ff-{fl ei ther golden or gilt from éfi gold.
It is usually such words as express a local relation, in some way or
other, that, like the adverbs, do not inflect the root before tak ing the
genitivem asW ET of the body, di e!“ of the month,m of the
country, a t!"of the north, &c . ; othernouns terminati ng inat inflect
i t aimwork , m art not m ar useful . T he inflected adverbsare fi t of above, (Elm of below, arm of yesterday, 810 .
Nola — The geni tive term ination indicates the gender of the noun
i tqual ifies and when it inflects a third personal pronoun, a dem on
strati ve or a relative, the pronominal geni tive expresses the gender and
number of the possessor, as well as of the thing possessed ear!“ of
him, firm, fit? of her, &c.
Note .
-The locative in f becomes adjectival by the aid of the suffix
qr smfim internal, of the mind 593, N ote
9 . Completion, abundance m trmfi i 'm a“
vfi 'qt m ay
W fl fl’
gxffl' Erma shoals on shoals of thi s k ind of fi sh come out
thence every year i nto the M edi terranean Sea ; nifi trh
W ‘Tm filfi fi the whole vi llage had come to see
the fun .
10. A change Of state : Qfi mm ’si‘
rfi'
a fi rm W(in?a poor man becomes a rich man
,and a rich man becomes
a poor man ;m w gfi 1 fl aqiafi firzm w e emam an?the tutor has told me to translate a Sanskrit
story from the Panchatantra into the vernacular to-day .
l l . A daptation or use : i f?Fi r-"th i ?arm that is a place for
bathing finerW W mai l i g ive heralso somewearingapparel .
593 T H E CASES. 3 1 9
592. In the above instances we have shown the connec
tion i ndicatedby the genitive between two nouns . It has some
times a reference to adjectives, adverbs, and verbs. Thus
I . The geni ti ve wi th an adjective
Wi th an adj ecti ve to denote the ground or object firWW area he was convicted of infanticide .
I I . The geni ti ve wi th an adverb
The partiti ve geni ti ve is ch iefly joined to adverbs W 3 773 0:
i gi as}?do not si t outside the house .
Note .— The postpositions are affixed to the inflected form of the
noun, or i ts geni tive case as m m:oram on the house .
III . The gen i ti ce wi th a verb
1 . T he geni tive i s sometimes used as both the subjectand objectof the verb 3mmm aim sari?3 12i arse art
-emit aw rfir 5171
aqr inferm i!"sti ll i t was not in J anu’s mind to acknowledge
that his opinion was wrong til"ears?W W I wi ll not hear
what he may say .
Nata — T he noun 51m saying, &c . , is no doubt, understood.
Nata — T he objective geni tive is chiefly governed by the compound
verbs,and expresses the object of some feeling ; em 8851 {TIT swear
I was angry with h im 3 71W 378 “ they dishonoured the
king 296
2. The genitive i s used adverbi a lly to exp ress the relati on oftime : firfem fi mit he Sleeps by day .
Note .— The geni tive expresses timemore emphati cally than the dati ve
ina : sit i ts wh en atria a?as (rather?wrt i ts assists area he
used to come every day i n the evening , and they both would be
alone for a long time in the n ight. In thi s sen tence the attention
is directed to the time of theirmeeti ng, whi le i n the following to the
place and not to the time i m i f?!378m, at EFT? film you
were out in the night, and where were you?
7 . T H E LOCAT IVE.
(m or emit. )593 . The Locative Case expresses the relation of place
i mi s s" arm? “3 3 a mg“
651 31 35 i t (the Sound) having
3 20 POSTPOSIT IONS GOVERN ING oasss . 594
fallen upon thei r ears, they began to look only in that direction
mart?i-fl'
H elms?wri t fi g? i‘ra
'
rfor th is reason he went out i n
the morning .
W m m fi fi’m ufi m afi h
‘i u
i sm Sui 3mm m , tari f fmm 3m:anti — T ukaram .
Note.— The locati ve sometimes takes the genitive termination
a‘
fs‘t’
m qifl ’
33!to give a mouthful out of one’
s own mouth .
m m a’
t i nfi w finnfi t u m s mnfi awfi arnNata — The i n i s an adjectival affix, li ke at in fife
'i’am.
594 . The locative expresses the following other relations
2. The object of the verb a new s‘
m’
f an argon} firam wwhen you convict him ,
then you wi ll prove h im a liar .
3 . I nstrumentali ty i f he eats wi th the mouth
W film!W hat i s done by oneself is well done .
sh at?wars emi thri ftnamW ri tergse’
fr'
n — Tukdrém .
é fiflffi wgW t IIgm?’i ’lfi '
fli W 7 II— M ukteswar .
m w w .— M uhteshwar .
4 . P urpose :W attunfit3em arm ?uan anfwfi t i s n
he sat down for medi tation, and felt God to be in the society
of men and in the desert.
CHAPTER XXVII I.
POST POS IT IONS GOVERNING CA SES .
595 599 .
595 . Several postpos itions are used in the place of case
term inations, or joined to case-terminations to vary thei r senseFIT Sfi i l
‘
am 3“
or HGT 3‘
give that mango to me .
T H E INST R UM ENTA L CA SE .
(m orm d
596 . The following postposi tions indicate the relation of
instrumentali ty
3 22 POBTPOSI‘I'
IONB Govsmvmc casns . § 598
of avai l when we have finished our journey and arrived at
home. This postposition occurs in learned discourse .
m expresses the object as, m (Ii i? tell him
m i g ive i t to him .
3 . 3 11 1?is generally used in poetry. It expresses
(a) The object “ W M ll
W fl tfl sfi cfi vfi’ u
(b) Ground or reason umrlfi m (g i ft : for thi s reason
Raghuvir came m m afi you should come for
the marriage of my son .
(c) Uti li ty orfi tness m fi rm g rafton?paper is fi t
for wri ting .
4 . T he postposi tions ant i ,GIST, a n, an]?denote the
purpose or reason. Thus,m In! 3 g ive a cow for th e
Brahman .
6 . as? at, expresses the object ;mm “ i t! send i t to
him .
3 . Tan A BLA 'I‘IVE Cass .
(W or M J
598. The following are the ablati ve postposi tions
1 . W denotes the source W xvi 81" take moneyfrom him ( SeeW under the instrumental case, 596
2. W denotes
(a) The source or motion from i fm small I havecome from him.
(b) A gency i 3d?"m the vessel was broken by
(c) Proximi ty i t w m 313 1 he went by our
village .
§ 599 J rosrrosxri ous con sume ossns. 323
this sin ; 2 ) privati on : m ( M W ) a: miEli “
3 mfi wh i t fi rth he has not brought the two rupees he
took from me .
(bl S i nce N T M uff an?I have been at home since
(c) Di stance from in space W W g: 3 11?it is farfrom my house .
4 . w is used to express compari son zm fi rstmafi a-fW1 ?an?he is wiser than thi s elder brother. It also expresses
a reason w arn w m m m fi m en’s since
you call me, I must come . 589, 2
5 . m expresses
(a) Source W «farm he came from upstairs.
(b) Locali ty m Ema?m am? all the people
sat on horseback .
(0) Approximation i ll m m he went by our
village .
Nata — m differs fromW . Both agree in expressing near
nest , butm indicates, in additi on, to pass close to an object wi thout touching it, so as to go from one side of it to another ;a?W
W W he went by our house (vici nity) ; i ll W W !“
WT he went past our house.
(d) Ground or reason : 581 “ ITm m W I recognized
you by your voice ; 3 1W“! Rm 3737 I went in conse
quence ofwhat you told me .
4 . T H E LOCA T IVE.
(W or fl 'flJ
§ 599 . The following are the Locati ve postposi tions. The
postposi tions 81h , mi have a purely locative force ;m i
m m i t?what benefi t i s there in staying at home atta in
W W m mfifflfl’m arfl'
the news ofbattle arrived
as soon as the bride came into the shed.
3 24 THE muses. I: GOO
Nates—The following idiom is worthy of notice aria in i s idioma
tically used for I t on in such cases as $ 31 6 a ring in (for on)the finger : so alsoW ”
311 3 1 shoes in the feet stink-t s’
nrtqra coatin the body ;m W‘fli
‘a turban in the head, &0 .
CH A PT ER XXIX .
THE USES OF THE TENSES .
600— 650.
600. The tenses have been considered as s imple and
compound. T he simple tenses differ from the compound not
only in regard to thei r form, but also the ir’
significati on . The
former express time indefi ni tely, the point of time at which
actions happen, wi thout regard to duration, and they are
appropriately employed to i ndicate sing le acts or habits, whi le
the latter i ndicate a duration or continuance of time,the time
during which a thing i s done .
601 . H ence the simple present, past and future tenses,
may be denom inated present indefini te, past indefini te, and
future indefini te .
T H E INDICA T IVE M oon.
PR ESENT Taxes .
The Present Indefini te.
602. l . The present indefini te indicates an act which
has lately commenced, and is in a state of progression :
fi sh ; you are jesting .
2. I t i ndicates an action that i s just about to commence
era vfi'
gm swig?firs m come, I wi ll show you somethingstrange or come I am going to show you, etc.
3 . It indi cates an action that wi ll certainly happen : and
m m i ii-mafia i i ? I shall give you leave to-mori ow,
thewhole day, from morning to evening at snaf u: fist}qrfi'
,
at genan W renw it cri s is as if we should not give
him the orchard, your father wi ll di rectly demand the five
hundred rupees from us snarl m amm afia now the
Government will certainly execute me.
3 28 THE muss s. 608
Note. When merely the proneness of an agent to do a certainact is
to be expressed, the genitive supine is used instead ofthe future perfect
tense (itgar?m and m he i s such a man as wi ll some
day or other do mischief.
The Present Dubi tati ve
The Present Dubitative expresses the probable occurrence
of an event in present time a“
?Sfl'
fl'l‘ 8m he m ight be
dining now.
PA ST T imes .
The Past Indefini te.
608. The Past Indefini te expresses an act which has
transpired in time already passed or spent :aftm arm mhe said to me yesterday fl lfi '
W m m “Tif f? he struck
me just a moment ago fafi m {fl}?fir! Hm she told me
the whole story .
2. It i s used in the first clause of a condi tional sentence
with at if, expressed or understood, to indicate the possi ble,
though most doubtful, occurrence of an event M 11 3 1mmmm m m m 3
“
3 should you ever pass our door,
come to me .
3 . It expresses an action that wi ll certai nly and w i thout
delay happen in future time, on certain condi tions being ful
fi lled flfl 'ra“?W W 3 “ tell me, and I shall also run to
him directly ; E lla?{Ti f fm Ti m 333 ? m bfl‘l'
W ,w m m 3 1 !mm they should wi th
perfect confidence in each other and with courage come forward,
and the success of the reformed party wi ll be an accompli shed
fact ;“
in,if?W m ark-Wyou go on I wi ll follow i mme
diately .
5 . I t i s joined to a statement to emphasize i t ; afar ale?
6 “ “Ti l 3 5 85 there i s no doubt about it, do you understand
W fi m m wfi wfi i m do you know what 1
have come to say to you
6 . It i s used for the present tense when expressing a desire
or opinion modestly M W Infi i’
rGift I want wanted
me u sers. 381
The Camoumi Past Habitual.
6 12. The Compound'
PastHabi tual has thwfirst zaeme ofthe simplepast habitual, viz. , that the act was habitual at some
past period m amm i m m m m i n mthousands of people used to come from great distances-to hear
The Imepto-Covcti nuative.
6 13 . The Incepto-Continuative expresses the commence
ment and continuance of an act m m m Dhri taré
shtra began and spoke as follows . This form i s used only in
translations of Sanskrit histories. The pure idiomatic expres
sion for ordinary use is the infinitive of the verb wi th m
The Dubi tative Pas t.
5 6 14 . The Dubitative Past expresses the probable occur
rence of an event in past time i t 313 1 m he must have
gone . It expresses a stronger degree of probabi li ty than the
future perfect form a t m W e was 1 11 m w e are?
you may have taught me, but I have no recollecti on of i t
N W Rfi 'm w an d ?you must have teased h im some
way or other writ-w3 3rdm even he must have done it.
The Past Prospective.
61 5 . (1 ) The Past Prospective expresses that the agent
had an intention in time past to do some action 16 m mfi w w n m m m m m I was to
have called on you yesterday, but as I felt unwell, I stayed at
home .
(2) It expresses that a certain act was on the point ofhap
pening in past time, but that i t i s uncertain whether it
actually took place or not m m W 6760 yester
day he was to have been tried.
Forum Truss .
6 16 . (1 ) The Future Indefini te 'expresses’an aet that
‘
i sato
occur in future time :m i 1 11 1 m it wi ll rain tom orrow.
3 32 rue muses.61 6
(2) It expresses willingness to perform a particular act 1;
” m a m m fi fl l wifl also look after the
one that you wi ll keep lfl a rmm afar i h I wi ll give h im
my share .
Nata— In English a future not spoken of in reference to a past act
takes the auxi lliary would and not will, but i n M arathi the
simple future i s used m m 3 13.
$ 1 i 81m Rfl fl‘fl
’ we were
very moment afraid that you would instantly die .
It expresses the incumbency of a particular act in an
interrogative sentence expressed in Engli sh by the auxi liary
should zéh'
i 1 551 ?why should I run in?m l 57 51? “ Ti l
why should he break i t he i s not mad.
It, wi th the particle at, expresses the certainty or in
cumbency expressed by shall:” i t aria he wi ll go ; i t
ari a-fl he shall go, i .e. ,
forced to go by another .
4 . It expresses potentiality, physical or moral, expressed i n
English by the use of the word can”in an interogative
sentence : em {in arr}?qrfl'
a terri erm he has got no teeth
yet, how then can he eat ? 3 8 3m gflqiaing-1 tfl‘ Ed i W
thi-a how can I be happy by plung ing another person 1nto
di stress
It may express i n like manner a past potential, expressed i n
Engli sh by could H i 3 6 “ WM 651 1 3 1 11 3118 ?how could
the sons of Pandu spread abroad over the whole country'
1’
5 . It i s used in the fi rst clause of the conditional sentence
with“
RT , expressed or understood,i f great respect is to be ex
pressed in the supposi tion : farm siren-r are; at m me17 m Fm an? i f you would have thegoodness to give him
medicine, I shall never forget your kindness as long as I live ;
W , W m at tfl W t W“
afi ladies, i f you wi ll
graciously permit me, I wi ll just go and be back in a
moment .
It may indicate also that the supposition ,in the opinion of
the speaker, is not li kely to be realized : W (rs-qui tam at
q'f‘
g’
as ; M i f you please to seat me upon the throne,
I wi ll govern the kingdom for you .
334. rep resses. (518
o’
cleck The verb {Tfi substituted for M signifies thesame thing . tfl
‘w m m (Il la.
(2) I t expresses also contingency, a li ttle doubt or nuoer
tainty as .to whether the action will really take place or not
m “ if?QT m m W most probably weh ave these
showers in our vi llage ;m In 3113 m m W your father
most probably will be expecting your return NTm in
i
m m W I shall most probably be at Poona this time
to-morrow.
Future Inceptive.
6 18. The Future Inceptive expresses the commencement
and continuance of a future act in future time : fill W i ll?!he will begin to go away .
The Future Perfect.
6 19. The Future Perfect expresses the completion of an
act before the occurrence of another future action:W endiaft i i i eras
-r I shall have gone there before you .
2. It may eXpress contingency :fir a11°51 he might
have gone . I t eXpresses possibi lity less emphatically th an rthe
dubitative past form inm : a?fis t 3mm he must have
gone . The probabili ty i s stronger i n the latter form
Future P rospecti ve.
620. 1 . The Future Prospective expresses that the agent
wi ll be about to dosomething at some future time gm?m ass?afim um:sfi wI shall be going to wri te when you come .
‘2. It expresses also contingency— that the agent may pro
bably be about to do a certain act a?inn:was; he may be
coming .
The Future Dubi tati ve.
621 . The Future Dubitative expresses the possibi lity of
an agent’s intention to do something i n future time til
W m m W he must be going , to read ito-day .
3 3 6 rue muses. 625
not wri ting , then only you should come and see me . It can
be used in the future as well as the present.
2. It may express that the agent may have an intention to
do the act supposed, but that the speaker has no knowledge
of it If?m m at a‘m m GM T shou ld he be going ,
then entrust the business to him.
PA ST Tunes.
The Past Indefini te.
6 25 . The Past Indefinite expresses that an event which
did not actually take place might have possibly occurred
m (T?w M ?m emit we should have had at least
enough for one or two days i i} i i i am arm as: gm r'qfi '
'
i lfl's‘
fifi “ Hi if he had come there,he would have let you go
nfi rwiwgmfi mfi ar fi m m i t missed by a li ttle,
otherwise she would have fallen ,i .e. , she narrowly escaped
falling ;mwm m m % mm at mm m mFun (In?an?had you not been at all that trouble for me,
I should have been dead long ago.
Past M cbi tative.
626 . The Past Dubi tative expresses uncertainty re
specting an action, which, if it ever occurred at all, must now
be fully performed . card?wi ll and?we are-«fl at w in( ft!«m
should he really have been gui lty of such roguery, then truly
be IS a blackg'l al
‘d s fi fi ffi m m at i leu m emshould he have arrived from Bombay, then let me know 1n
stantly e m firm aft i i i W W though he should not
have gone, sti ll I mean to go to him. It i s used in the untccs
dent clause of a conditional sentence.
FUTUR E Taxes .
The Future Indefi ni te.
§ 627 . The Future Indefini te expresses that a person
might have intended to do a certain acti on, but that he did
not : i f M m HU I?i t?!ifhe had intended to go, i t wouldbe delightful .
3 38 THE T ENSES . 6 29
Note.— The use of the verb t ri ll, on the occasion of leave tak ing ,
is considered unlucky , as i t suggests death, the fi nal departure . ai i i'
implies a oommg agai ;n smfi M i a-r; grin 31 15:mail I shall be
going continue to regard me wi th afi’
ection .
6 . I t is used interrogatively to express inqui ry errai anq'vrm W l’ what shall we do now li t . , what i s imcum ben t
on us to do now?
Note.— The subjunctive form denotes a certain degree of i ncum
bency which is entirely absent from the imperative anal W mark ?what shall we do now
7 . Interrogatively i t is used as expressive of great surpr i se
or emotion W , m wi tm pardon you ,too
,should
speak in that way'
1’ This i s a more polite form than the pre
sent indicative m ,m 313 W l‘
It expresses emoti on ,
wi th the force of the potential verb ( “ Ti ff 3 1111? EST! W T H f‘mfl ?what can we now say of hi s state ?W W W
m fi m m sfl nfi mm é‘
rm «fi rm ?what can we
say of the annoyance which Ganpatrav has offered us from the
moment we came ?gm garaimm l“? boy, what shall I say
to you The speaker indicates by the subjunctive form in the
last three sentences, that he i s qui te perplexed, and does not
know what to say or do .
8 . W i th the conjunctions ] particlesW therefore, &c.,i t
expresses purpose 31 : at arm s =rm w m w an
press a sharp-poi nte d pebble to his ear, in order that he may
not again commit the same fault (N T 9mm W R dwe?mm i f?all the fowls had assembled, in order that they might
e lect a k ing .
9. It i s used for the gerund tarmm m m wnfl'
a'
proper to place authori ty 1n the hands of such a man fé mwe are-writrm werem ansGod knows full well how
to govern thi s world i ttria {W M ?m Fulfi l I have to
run hi ther and thi ther i n the garden.
10. It i s frequently used for the past habi tual tense, and
then i t may be rendered into Engli sh by would m afl
6 3 0] m s TENSES . 3 3 9
m m fi marsrm W W u m wfi fiw fi in
general he hurt no one only when he was excessively teased,
he would become outrageous ; fai l film fi n“
fl ifl fi‘snfi 5?{N
fi m afl fim i rfia m w efiw w m she
would constantly tease her and r eproach her that she did not
possess the virtues which are rarely found even in grown-up
women.
1 ] It expresses a s uppositi on which in the opinion of the
speaker should necessarily be realized arr?he should
come to-morrow.
1 2. The subjunctive may be used in the past and future, as
well as the present, tense (past) targarwri ter as?£ 217??n(rah el 3m Eli
'
l aren'
t why should I have taken you on the coach
box'
3 why should I have put the re ins into your hands l twrél'
afi all qfl '
ti‘
aW e gri ll-l“ I too should have come, but at the
very time I became unwell . Sometimes, howe ver, the past
auxi liary might be used : an Glflfi"i f? you should have told
me . For the future, see No . 6 .
Note — Duty is either present or future, and the simple subjunctive
expresses this sense of duty when i t is employed to denote pre
sent or future action : armor 1 16m am 3113 we should give food to
the poor a ft?an?’IW IH 5113“ he should go tom orrow to the
place of worship . In the past tense i t expresses generally the notion
of the habi tual occurrence ofan act, or the possibi li ty of its occurrence,
or some other non-ethical relation. When duty is spoken of in relation
to the past, the compound form made up wi th the past tense of sn'
éto be, is used mfi In?a?he should have come. T he auxi liary fi
'
fimight be omi tted as in the above sentencein the text : t ext gm mi l
afi i sari why should I have taken you on the coach-box?
The ethical sense of obligation i s usually expressedby the subjunctivewi th the subject in the instrumental case, otherwise it denotes that of
uncertainty : i ll strawamen he could not have come fi t an?afi '
you ought to come to-morrow.
630. The negative forms of the subjunctive mood are
three, viz. , (l ) the subjunctive wi th a not, prefixed, as a Erma(2) the infini tive wi th a? (a not and i t it comes, li terally, it
does not come ) , as tar eraI should not come and (3 ) the
3 40 THE TENSES . 6 3 1
with propriety come ; W at I should not do i t .
Of these three forms the first 1 8 not usually used,bu t the
second i s often used to negative the subjunctivemood in most
of i ts senses. T his form takes the subject in the instrumental
case . The third form has a special sense it expresses an i h
ferior degree of impropriety, especially that where the impro
priety does not consi st in the act i tself, but in that act taken
'
n connection with the si tuation of the speaker at the time
war?arm!t hata? I cannot with propriety do thi s work .SET
fli t would be stronger and would convey the idea that
something which was in i tself improper had been asked to be
done
Note.-The origi nal sense of the phrase in ai with air i s that of nu
profitableness or inexpediency , but what is inexpedient i s often morally
wrong :W I“
GI'
I‘
Hl’ airI should not eat i t, i . e. I am so circumstanced
that i t is not expedi ent or advantageous for me to eat i t, though there
is nothing wrong if I did eat i t as you desire. T his is a mi ld and
poli te refusal.
6 3 1 . The negative form of the subjunctive mood in the
i nfinitive mood and 3 3 being usually used, we shall g ive some
examples of i t.
1 . It expresses the ethi cal sense : 3 1W “! “ Tim war
m we should obey our parents corresponding negative
form would bemartwat;3 3 we should not obey Trr'
h'
ifi l'
ama
'
frvfi'
H’
s:airno one ought to be ashamed ofpoverty ; armari
‘
we must not give up hope. M ark the force of the subjunctive in the last example .
2. It means a di sposi ti on or habi t : unitm mw i fii 3 3 he was such a man that he could not speak to
his servants wi thout brandi shing a stick over them.
3 . It may express purpose : ( fi rm?m in H afi'
éfi'
(M I? W the end for which regal power i s valuable i s that
all should obey the k ing’s commands a corresponding nega
tive construction is rrszrfi was Q”! Eh‘l'm an?fi t a
”? that
no wi sh of the ki ng should remain unfulfilled i s the end for
wh ich regal power i s valuable .
3 42 was TENSES . 63 4
m Infini tive M ood .
63 4 . The infinitive i s used to express an action that
depends upon another, and restricts it 3 3 1min 3 1m?H is:3 letus die of hunger.
63 5. In English the infinitive, being also the gerund, ad
mi ts of various uses, but in M arathi the gerund is di stinct from
the infini tive and also from the Supine, and consequentlyi ts use i squi te restricted. It chiefly forms the object of verbs
expressing the acti on of the mi nd or wi ll— such as {fi fi to
wi sh,m to see, in the sense of to des ire, al'
afi’firto be able
, ato g ive, in the sense of to allow, m at to affect, etc. as i t 6535
{fi s fi he desires to do i t ; til i ris;qwa’t he wi shes to come; efl
' il‘
art trifle: she wi ll be able to do i t;newi t 3 allowme to come
fi t fi m he began to read. Formerly many other verbs
governed the infini tve «fit Qt W , he set h imself
to take the medicine. The infini tive may be considered as a
verbal accusative.
Nata— In Vedic times the verbal noun formed from a root by the
termination 33 175 , 1113 was regularly declined In process of
time only the accusative form was retained,and came to denote the
sense of the dative. H ence the present Infinitive form always conveys
thedative sense . In Marathi , also, i t i s only accusati ve, and in capable
of being used as the subject and its dative form (the dati ve supine)expresses the dative sense of purpose.
Note. The Sanskrit Infini tive corresponds in Latin, to the
supine in um (datumM ), which i s properly the accusati ve of a verbal
substantive just as in Sanskrit” — Ap te.
Note.— In Sanskrit the verbs to desire, to be able, to know,to con
strain, to begin, to get, etc. , govern the i nfini tve in $ 5 .
6 36 . The dative supine can be used in the place of the
infini tive in every one of the above examples i f?at or t orr
m {Fug-HT he wishes to do i t . The verb 3 ?to allow may take
only the infini tive wari t 3 , letme come W657 arm fa?a?!Wri tthe wind wi ll not let me wri te .
64 0] rs s rss ss s. 3 4 3
Note.-ln Sanskrit also the i nfini tive is re-placed by the dative of
the verbal noun deri ved from the root.
563 7 . The principal use of the i nfinitive in Engl ish i s to
express the purpose of an action; I come to bury Cwsar, not to
prai se him,aftW m M eni wm‘taflfi m unfi t
atfi . But this sense is expressed in M arathi by the subjunc
ti ve mood, and the dative supine .
638. When the purpose of an acti on i s expressed by a
distinct sentence or clause, the subjunctive mood i s used in Ma
rathi , otherwi se only the dative supine [W W W ] “ iwaftm ark fifi all the fowls had assembled in order that
they might elect a k ing . The same may be thus expressed
wi th a dative supine H i 'nfi‘
tri rrm m m fia‘all
the fowls had assembled for to elect a king .
63 9 . When the infinitive i s used as the subject of the verbin English, especially wi th the verb to be the gerund i s
used in M arathi to laugh i s natural,m m 3 l1i .
T H E PA R T ICIP LES .
I .— The Present Tense.
640. The present participle has three simple, and two
compound forms .
I .— (l ) The form in in is the princi pal one, and i s usuallyused to make up compound tenses fi unfit he i s reading
fi fi mfi rrfi he does not speak ; fi fifi w fi m fi fi when
I went, she was crying . It expresses the currency of action .
(2) I t i s used with other verbs to define them gig m3 3 131 1 m ire do you yourself continue the work di ligently
m m an go on worshipping God'
fi fi t m 3 317 (TIGHT
he stood look ing at the show all fli t ( in aw she sat there
laughing .
Nata— When the present participle in fat is thus adverbially used
it may be Optionally reduplicated i f the verb which it modifies is a
verb of moti on or action ; at}m orm and?she cameweepi ng,
but if}m m orm she sat down or lay down weeping
am m g?m he walked on mi i look at that boy, he comes eating .
re s muses . 640
m «aW uv‘
rammom n
Anandtanaya .
(8) W i th the negati ve particle i t may express the notion
of wi llingness, besides that of currency m mag ? won ’t,
you speak {W uh a i vmfi a «m i fi tfi i i ts won’t
you take my ring now then I wi ll get angry with you mm i n anfi Daulatsing won
’t take i t.
II . 1 ) Theparticiple inmi expresses thatwhile the actiondenoted by it i s going on, that denoted by the verb takes
place: If?m m «riffw ar?he fell down whi le walking .
T he parti ciple is usually repeated to express the sense of
duration
(2) But when the participle does not express an idea of
duration or continuance, i t i s not repeated :m m m come
at twelve o’clock “ W i temi tI got upas soon as he call
ed out to me ; rarer aW W W a'
ai'rm wi thout the i r
knowledge she went after them and stood there ;m *aW W W “ W fifi '
they set themselves to take
the medicine without at the same time mak ing any wry faces.
(3 ) The partici ple i s used to make up the indirect objectof the transi ti ve verb when the indi rect object expresses an
action in progress :mm m rqi 'nffik I saw him play.
II I The participle inmia'
rexpresses, like that inmi ,that while the action denoted by i t i s going on, another action
i s performed : “ Itm gi ft m W m I read off
your note whi le taking my meals. It usually expresses the
sense of duration.
2) It expresses the indirect object: tarm m mvrfi i i
' I saw him beating the horse.
Notc.-The difference between the participles mi and (aim,
when
they express the indirect verbal object, is the same that exists between
the English infini tive and the present participle, used objectively : Isaw him strike
,and I saw him stri king .
IV. 1 ) The compound participle in i nm expresses the
progressive sense like the above two participial forms : and?
W m i fm he came whi le we were playing . It is
3 46 TH E TENSES . 64 0
junctional clauses, like those in which the particles'
ri g i then,Ht then, af t sti ll, occur.
(1 ) The form in an m expresses that a past even t i s
in some way the cause or occasion of the act mentioned i n the
following clause : i i? (4175 arra'
rei flai wr‘afl'
giz gi t : 3331271 “whenever he came down,
hi s disposition would become the
same as before .
(2) It i s used in the fi rst clause of a condi tional sentence
to express a probabi li ty stronger than that denoted by a rmm fiat
-erW 3 13"!m i llW i f means he used, i t wi ll sti ll
be possi ble to rid him of his badquali ties .
3 ) It has'
the sense of the particle although : Fifi "rim ‘fl'
i fi
W ests:W e}are?area?m i s;m are?though I shou ld
spend all my estate, I could not make up her loss ; {H air 3 3 7 3
W fi im though I said so much, nevertheless he wen t .
W i th thi s form fi even mi ght also be used : {at was: srqai fii f 373 1 .
4 . (l ) T he principal use of the participle in t a i s to connect
two clauses which otherwi se would be joi ned by the conjunction 3 1e and and i t denotes that the act expressed by i t pre
cedes in point of time that mentioned in the succeeding clause
fi rs:qfi"W gash he turned over four leaves, and asked m f
3? arm m amq' mi trig? I wi ll go into the presence of my
uncle, and on my knees beg hi s pardon‘
éfi‘afi
’
rt i"q'm ai slem
’R‘
o'
er; ( first?fi afi‘those lambs were pi led one above another
,
wi th their feet bound. In these sentences the subject or the
agent of both the acts i s the same .
(2) T he subject of the partici ple may be di fferent from that
of the verb :rrrifrfi t s!fart Esra ( racist after si ng ing i s over, sti ll a
goodpart of the daywill remai n i t? fi t ? ai r Errfi i I think
a year has passed since I saw you last Farm firm Emirfawn
grl-37 ? how many days i s i t since he died
N ote.— Iu these examples, the sense of the pluperfect may be ex
pressed by postposi tions joinedto the past tense . l i rai fit-1 W mwas:may also be on strewn 8m it! th e as?e re-se m i
tt, or
fi r m-arm ; orEra mom?“ afi fi’
:WW
m . &c.
6 4 3 ] TH E TENSES . 3 4 7
(3 ) It expresses the cause of the verbal act that follows
arm-raft 11W su re?am g rai i I have gotqui te feeble by con
stan t sickness eh an at ? W he died of , fever i i i Era smai
afi a i nrm m aw fi mw rt fia efi t fi m as he was
re turning . he came to a river on the road, through which , from
a g reat fall of rain that had taken place, he saw there was no
p assage ;W W W W W W ?what would you get by
k i lling me 1?
(4 ) It has the force of a-rti although, when t a inflects the
v erb staff ; erg?If?strum; st if f {tramwere?see, whata blunder I
h ave commi tted, wise man as I am i f i s often added to 3 71 37.
(5) It i s used to make up the forms of some compound verbs
g t ? ETEE'
wash i t thoroughly tafii ii t if f fi tthe flung i t away .
N ata — In the phrase am an?a substitute for i f t ffltfii I know,
the participle expresses the sense of the verb intensely or forcibly féat ’fi W si fi
‘that I know full well .
6 4 ] The future participle i nour expresses that the speak
er has some knowledge of the i ntention on the part of the
agent to do the act denoted by the participle a?i tvm'
SITE“ he
i s going to come . It is chi efly used to make up the forms of
the compound tenses . I ts form in an i s used as a verbal
adjective '
i l'flrfi
'
ii iar.‘
the people who intend to come .
64 2. It i s used asa noun in the form of our as well as wrtr,and the case-inflections are often added only to the former
form: si‘
ravrr'
i'
gash-as, w it: i f? there are many to speak , but
few toact ; HR WR‘
FQ’
, (i n the Deckan WW ) are tin t-fies,cm si
‘
revrrl'
rsfii (W m ) i ts tim are?we can hold the hands
of the stri ker, but cannot stop the mouth of the speaker .
T H E GERUND.
64 3 . 1 . T his expresses the simple verba l act, W i thout anycircumstances of time
,mode , &c .
, and i s substantival in use,
being declined in all the cases, like a neuter noun ending in
(i ; as t rai doi ng ;w arm for doing ;W [ of doing , 850 .
Thus, aura?m uffaim?atri a hi s actions are good firi qtfi‘q'wfiai i nnit W3?she did not escape punishment W amfi l‘arrayqraam am an?i t is imperati ve that I should obey my father .
3 4 8 rue TENSES . [Q6 4 4
Notc.-The gerund may take i ts object when i t is a transitive verb
Qm m m i t} uri c you owe me fi fty betelnuts.
N eta— The verbs are given in the dictionary in the gerundial form,
and the verb is named by it ; as $ 135?hug the verb to do .
2. It i s used for the imperative as a. most indefinite form
W M a fl continue to wri te to us . It,being indefinite, is
most respectful, and occurs frequently in the old Bakhara, as
well as in letters :W M " lafi'
t ti t“!W W W then they
said that Ramsing should have patience ; aftgl fi arrfiqi a ht fi you may nevertheless make them both prisoners. It is a
more courteous form than even the subjuncti ve.
8. Wi th the verb srflfi'
,i t expresses the sense of obligation
or necessity :W th e arm Hfi 811?one day wehave to die
Tm: Snrms s.
64 4 . The forms of the supines are two— dative and
geni tive .
64 5 . The Dative Supine— T he dative supine has the
following speci al uses
1 . The dative supine i s usually used for the objecti ve infinit ive : i ii” i i t t
’
orm mm hewishes to do i t . It is only
a fewverbs that take the infini tive as the object. but the supinemay be used with all the verbs .
2. The dative supine i s used wi th the personal or dative
object,to complete or define i ts sense, especially wi th the verbs
aim? to tell snarfi ifi to command, w to teach, m y.
fifi i to persuade,'
ti'
tai to inspire, W to employ, (to aqfiW m ai m “
Gm he employed him to how wood
a re?W m Firt h“? he taugh t him to pray em m .
m m t ram he commanded me to k i ll him . T he supines
indi rect objects denoting acti on .
3 . The dative supine i s employed to express purpose gi ft
m m fi'
a'
i‘what went ye out for to see W153m m armm w come wi th me to see my garden .
3 50 T H E T ENSES . 6 5 0
probabili ty— li ttle short of absolute certainty a? (ram
-r fi-qfi
3 11 7}W ? she 1s such a person as wi ll one day or o th e r
su tely domi sch ief .afteraware 8 1TW atm , w air
-g m
3 653: the stone struck his ear, and i t the ear was read y to
break off, but the act was deficient by a li ttle ’
b e the car w as
wi th in an ace of being struck off.
650. The'
following are examples of the negative cons t ru c
ti on zgvfi awrsrfim‘
h arts? feats r’
sae grr, H1?!sfi atrw ar are?bury me in the ground as many days as you please , but I s h a l l
never di e 3 3 3 i fairer: m , frt it—fr w m fi rst 3 3 GramW lfi i FIR
"
?then T rimbak said that the ball would never m ove
forward even an inch .
Nola — T he gerundial dative and geni tive shouldnot be confound
ed wi th the dative and geni tive supines . T he gerund is simp ly
nominal, having the force of an abstract noun, and should be u sed
when an action is viewed as a thing or object ;but when the sense of
action or the actual performance of a thi ng i s predominant, the sn
pines should be used. T he gerund should never be used in the cases
mentioned under the Dative and Genitive Supines, T hus, a
"?arra
( 1;e fi a'
rqrq"
drum:an? he is going to come to sleep to-nigh t i s
correct, but fi am a i lwrt 3 11? would be wrong mam 13 6 mW 31011?what shall we call their playi ng
?m would be wrong
in this sentence ; sui t Irma?tffi i ii"3?t wh i ch are the hymns to
be sung to-day!But aroma?Ifi i-
‘
i snort bring the singing songs, or
songs used i n singing .
Note — T he snpines are inflected forms of the infini tive, which, etymologically as well as in regard to thei r use
,are substantival in char
acter. T hey are of the nature of the gerund, abstract nouns, denot
i ng action, but, unli ke the gerund, they, i n the dative case, express the
sense of “a purpose. T hus
,
“ he goes to read”
would be if!mantra
am ,not araoqra
‘
anal? so also“ what shall I do for h is readi ng
”
would be imammanure ,notmi naret aim aria ? In Sanskri t the
form 1555 is not inflected i n the dati ve to express thi s sense of pur
pose arm'
s“
; cram he goes to cook .But even in Sanskrit i t is only a.
few special verbs that can take the forms in an . I ts eficiency i s
made up by the aid oi other forms,and by the use, li ke the M arathi
dative supine, of a verbal dati ve ; arm?mama he goes to the act of
cook ing .
-M ar M uller .
653 ] T HE PA R T ICLES . 3 51
CH A PTER XXX .
T he Parti cles .
TH E A DVER B .
65] 682.
6 51 . The declinable adverb agrees, in gender and num
b e r, ei ther wi th the subject, or with the object of the verb'
e'
fl W mi re; she wi ll dance well ;a?W ar‘
é art'
i'
z-i‘
r how
d o es he sing am at “ mm W W thus he fell i nto
ve ryg reat distress . The declinable adverb i s thus used
W hen the subject is uninflected, and the verb i s intransit i ve , the adverb agrees wi th the subject if?arm W she
W alks well a?wa i f?firmerEmmi
?he i s opposed to me .
2 . W hen the verb takes an un i nfleeted object, the adverb
ag rees wi th the object, in preference to the subject if? ma im?afi i
‘
h‘she sings well .
3 . When both the subject and object are inflected, the ad
verb I S put in the neuter singula1‘
c‘
zrfi W afi ' W how
cou ld he beat him?
4 . The adverb i s put i n the neuter singular, also, when the
subject of the intransitive verb is omi tted as well as inflecteda?“ 11 0W W i ll i t be ? i fl fi
'
3 T? fi f l’
how could he go?
a . The adverb i s employed in the neuter singular, also ,
wh en the object of the transi tive verb i s omi tted, andthe verb
expresses merely i ts general sense of action Fl’l‘afi ' W how
does he read a‘i at? how does she si ng but a?GR IT ll’nfi
qrf-‘qfi‘
r how does he read the book
652. One adverb may modify another adverb,and then
both agree in gender and number 3c!"
fire“ W afqaff
37337 an?war i f ?see how well God has ordered thi s matter .
653 . A dverbs expressing the sense ofquality, or rather
adjecti ves used adverbially, can be compared li ke simple adjec
tives ; ( ral-nrw flan a
'
rf‘
afi M aina reads better than
Rama. 522.
3 52 T HE n arro ws . 654— a
654 . In a compound sentence the relative adverb intro
ducing the ini tial clause i s followed by i ts correlative Ffi' 313 i
i ts?swi sh ( 11 112 3 1 1 Wi tW W W em 1 5: whenever she
nsed to see her mother in anger, she was afraid.
The relative particle may be omitted ; 'fl'
W W i tN T i s?m an?I used to work when I was young i i {muffs fl it 3 1r
I Q?at“ ?we should do as you may b1d us .
655 . The relative adverb of time m i may be _repeat
ed to convey the sense of frequency, and the correlative follow
ing i t i s usually repeated first?fiatm a! q? as“ fig }
(3? fi am id?m i awhenever her eyes fell upon her, theyused to fi ll wi th tears. In the following sentence the adverb
is not repeated'I‘l
'Fil
' “
ci li a?“ W W , w i f?W QT
m Rafa they drive me away whenever I attempt to go to them .
656 . When flat i s joined toW ,i t expresses the rare
occurrence of an event, and the correlative i s only once
mentioned :W W W m m W W W fl ,
flag?g i ver. i’ra'
fi ‘it}flat 3 1 :Rift zi tmfi sometimes when she hap
pened not to do attentively what she was bid, then T rimbakshet
used to hang the jay again i n that place .
063 .— For the meanings and uses of other adverbs, See 3 48.
T H E Pos'
rPosrrmN .
657 . The postposi tions, which are capable of inflection;agree wi th the nouns to which they refer in gender and num
ber or H ii‘rfl'
afi:$ 18 ( i f?Grit fr? twenty elephants
stood around him . The postposi tions, i n conjunction with the
nouns which they inflect, form adverbial phrases, and conse
quently follow the same laws of concordance wi th the declin
able adverbs . 508.
658. Postpositions may inflect a whole sentence: ah"avi
fiat W are?I wi ll not go wi thout taking the rupees;
w 318 m If?all? gfifl'
after I have met him, I shall
ask him . The postposi tion inflects the verbsm and we}?as i f they were nouns firefl+am: When the postposi
tions thus govern a sentence, the sentence ends in the past
tense inm. 504 , 1 , Note.
3 54 T HE PART ICLES . 66 1
the house, calling out to her mother, sister, and the servants,
and showing it to them.
5 . m may be indiscriminately used,but not so i f.
§ 66 l . The copulative conjunctions are often omi tted in
M arathi , and the omission frequently imparts naturalness and
animation to the narrative :m m fiffira'
3mwri t W W . W m m fl mfi ; swim weari tem fearm m vfi ;W ?fl i ers emit amenerrfi
'
efi am aft
fi‘efm ist rtra
'rweft; i f?mm
”?afghan? firmmt wri ter?are?m
l eali ty she did not dece ive her mothel , she deceived herself.
Formerly she used to be always cheerful . She would find
delight in the societv of her mother,and wheneve rher mother
went out and came home, she would gladly go forward and
embrace her ; but all this happiness was now lost to her eafi
W anamai a fiwaffimfi fl fi ;m afi wfi a fia fi i’
t
fifi'
3 11?he has bid us do what would do us good, and forbidden
what would injure us .
662. On the other hand, the l epeti tion 0 1 the conjunctionarrests the attention, and rivets i t on the detai ls :arrW 31 8
W then she put the jay in the cage, and went wi th i t
all over the house, calling out to her mother, and si sters,and
the servants, and showi ng i t to them. The p articles are, how
ever, often omi tted, and the attention i s drawn to the detai ls
by the tone of the voi ce : 'F I’ w m fi , hi?
emit, f‘
fi , “ l i m m xnfi , fi r,efi mfi‘a mfi amr an d ?
was erw e ,1inn-r, art,
’i rérefi , afaram? emit
-armay i f“ ?
ffifl‘then the squ ire took Davlatrév upstairs, where he had
beforehand collected such frui ts as grapes, l imes, shaddocks,
pine-apples, pomegranates, plantains, figs, guavas, and such
flowers as the rose, the jessami ne, the jasmi ne, the Christmas
flower, and the champaca fi lai 5?emf? fi l l? W S"?ém a
‘
is r'
er,m , erazrrfi , a re, smfi gossamerg? eras she
was then so much overpowered wi th joy that she k issed her
mother profusely on her l ips, her cheeks, her eyes, her breast,
and her hands .
6 64 ] T H E PA R T ICLES . 3 55
6 6 3 . The disjunctive conjunctions 3mm and fifl T, or,
d i ffer a li ttle in sense,though the di fference i s little attended to .
W has only a di sj uncti ve force, whi le Fan" has the addi tional
s en se of variety: fi vfi‘si f t 313 173 W W
W ei-am m fiwrme em it Emm a-na
g i ftmm; WGT’IT i f any honest people suffering from
p o verty desire to get a mouthful of food, or g lean stray ears of
co rn, you should never molest them m m m “ it"fl a t
m e wm m aa‘r. « fi rm er-its mm a emu "
3 1m m m m m fi am w eurefl sisteri f?! 3 18 376 would your majesty be pleased i f I praised him i n
your presence as he deserves, or could I say anything unfavour
ab le of him in the presence of one who could deal with him,
at once, according to hi s deserts
2. NWT!“
and rel?“ are often elegantly used to vary parti
cles a sear tam Fakerfi rearm-Raf errfirar, W t «h astart ar Rafa emr 3m s
‘
rar'
é we w e are? whether i t (the
charge) was true, or a trumped up one,or he really i ntended
doing i t cannot be precisely determined .
664 . When the second clause of a compound sentence
limi ts the signification of the fi rst, the adversative conjunctionmfg or q'or, but, i s inserted: 1 W W m 61? i f?
vrftv'
earm m mar;W gm cart fears w rarvvrfae‘mfi‘rm aft
gar sui tgit, eff; W are?because you have confessed your
fault, I wi ll simply not punish you but I wi ll not call you my
Durgaunless I try your peni tence for many days arm-r Wi‘rfi‘fi eth er, Rafi Tran
-arr, ersrsr
‘
frserum arses sm ear, as ,safer
am an?my brother has good manners , and i s of a frank
and generous disposi tion but he is at the same time a li ttle
rash, forward and obstinate ; { mmW ET Eff are? ifim r
he swore, but did not speak the truth;at?or at?could be sub
stituted for trot.
NOla— T he adversative sentence in which the second clause limits
the fi rst, could be converted into a condi tional sentence, denoting con
cession a t?mmare:{Tiff—”rstirrer, writal arm ,
the at}as"? areas
W W I , &c.,an?although my brother i s of good habits, &c.
,still he
3 5 6 T H E PA RT ICLES . 665
is at the same time a little rash, &c. T he conditional i s preferablewhen the opposi tion is pointed.
665 . When the second clause contradi cts the first, the
whole sentence i s constructed in two ways
1 . When the fi rst clause i s posi tive, i .a. , does not contain a
negative particle, and the second clause i s negative, the two
clauses are simply put together, wi thout the insertion of an
adversative particle fi atW “ Era,atri a are?she decei
ved herself, not her mother ; sti lt‘fiE
'
i f?!ai l fflffi raféli'
, W
511 art?i n a thing li ke this, i t i s thei r fault, not ours.
2. When the first clause contains a negative particle and
the second i s afi rmative, the adversative parti clesmay or may
not be inserted : W W552!W i t? (or at after)by eating poison, man wi ll not li ve, but di e . The adversative
at then is only used, neverqi‘
g orqwnevertheless .
3 . When two opposi te clauses are joined simply to indi cate
variety , and not contradiction,the copulative conjunction
saferand, in the sense of No . 1 , is used gem SHIT-Ti"
3mM an?the boy i s weak ,
and the girl i s strong .
666 . When more than two adversative clauses are uni ted
i n one sentence, both Worbut, and anfarand, in i ts oppositional
character, are employed to connect the clauses sitar-“ eraWfi fi é
‘
rarwfitfi wefl ifi tw W Ear 5 1253 53731 W t mi ,Sim-71 W fl
'
l'
fl Fifi M i ii “ !m etre I am fully aware
that people do so, but I have not met wi th a s ing le fault in
V686 , whereas A tmarammustbe, at least, gui lty of a thousand.
In this sentence the second clause l imi ts the first,and the thi rd
negatives the second hence W very naturally comes between
the fi rst two clauses,and sm
'
i rbetween the second and the last.
W hen, however, the second clause negatives the fi rst and
the third limits the second, there i s no particle i nserted be
tween the fi rst and the second clause, wh i le W i s inserted
before the third : (fi esta?ate“
?sibm wrsfi‘ass—«ft, aim
i rW , W $ 3 3 55 W W the plates and di shes of the
farmer were not of gold and si lver, but only of brass and
copper, nevertheless they were clean and bright . afi still,
would be preferable tow .
6 74 ] T H E PA R T ICLES . 3 59
H ence when a person speaks of himself with modesty, he
uses the past tense in the condi tional clause ; the past tense,
being an emphatic form, imposes a high degree of obligation
on him :m m w m m arti sfl sfim swe aters:
M 3113175 ?i f I prai sed him before his face, as I might in
j ustice be expected to do, then would your majesty be pleasedI t would be rude to use this form in reference to a person of
superior station .
6 72. When an event is certai n or of frequent occurrence,and the performance of another act depends upon i t, the past
tense i s used followed bym ?!i nstead of at : m wri t W
n 373?when uncle goes out, I wi ll even then meet you
fl?arm-rW W Gin tell me as soon as he comes grgm
W rfieafiahwrmri t é‘
i arte ries-a im sufbrfem m at
“T3 ? m are whenever thi s boy goes i nto the company of
other boys, they drive him away, and say,“ we wi ll beat you i f
you shall come back agai n.
Nata— The past i ndicative sometimes denotes an event which i s
least likely to happen in future time Ernaff “ (N E H were
at flash“
? 3 should you ever pass our door, come to me. T he past
indicative here denotes an event which is not dependent u pon the
wi ll of the person of whom i t i s affirmed,and therefore most contin
gent.
Note.— Instead of the past tense, the imperati ve m ight be used 3 gr
% e m e?1am (star) am?wh enfi fe put the ox to the water
wheel , and he wi ll then improve.
6 73 . W hen an event has actually taken place, and there is
no doubt in the speaker’s mind about i t, the present and the past
tense of an?are used to make up the verbal forms a?3 1:fi t=rr€r of which you have no doubt at mm”
311 =rr€r i f he i s
not a th ief, then he has nothing to fear at aan? fr'
ai'
at wari f they had come they must have seen me fi r FIT
Ell'
ai li , at fi g”
?i f“ !fi ts i f he is here , then you wi l l see h im
6 74 . W hen the speaker does notquestion the occurrenceof an event
, but Simply wants to express that he has no know
ledge about i t, then arm i s substi tuted for Sui : i t frvim‘i hm
3 60 T HE PA RT ICLES . 675
m fll‘l
’W w : though he should have gone to another
continent, I wi ll fetch hi m thence ;W W W G IT fi‘t‘
fi'
w i ll?at should the teacher have g iven them leave, what then
5!arm 8m?!at W 31573 should he be going, then do not come
i fi fé’qfl
'
smart; at If?m 1 16?shou ld you be going to
wri te, I shall not wri te at i t vi a ai r? arm at should h e
be in some place just here, then’2
6 75 . W hen we wish to express that the event migh t
have been di fferent from thatwhich has actually happened, the
condi tional mood i s used armsfl 3mmfi rst aura?at a?momit had I needed more money, I would have sold the
whole ;EwrarW staff swat?arm marries i tem if you had
pardoned him ,then Ramawould not have been so much grieved .
This is the most common use of the M arath i conditional mood .
676 . When the th ings supposed are very shortly to hap
pen, the condi tional i s used “
i t H?a t?"F":H'fé
‘
rara‘
i 1f he were
going then I would go also (Present tense) .
67 7 . When the conditional clause denotes a concession ,
the particles at?and aft are used {Half‘
u‘
ffi aft emi t
era-e although I told him so much, he did not listen
31W? 3 1 3 31'
l film?if it t i ff i 3 35 although Devrav
was Shedding tears, sti ll he smi led when he heard that . germ-Ii
or m ight be substituted for the condi tional particles
{fi 3 553 31TH?Fl? though I said so much,sti ll he went away .
T H E INTER J ECT ION .
678 . The i nterjection i ‘fq, yes , requi res a word of expla
tion . In answering aquestion, the verb employed i n the question i s repeatedwi th or withoutEra yes . I f a man was asked
i f hi s work was completed, he would be asked arm i n?have you
doneyour work li terally, i s the work done)?H e would answer,
i ts; g rit yes , i t is done, or simply i n"
? i t i s done never only
an yes .
679. But since é‘
rzr i s a form of the verb flat to become,
and,as a verb, i s used i n the sense of 3 11i , i s i t can
naturally be used by i tself when the question i s put wi th the
3 62 PR INCIPLES or vsasrrroa'
rrou. 684
Note.— The rules of M arathi versification are principally deri ved
from Sanskrit.
684 . QUANT ITY (W ) indicates the time taken in p r o
nounci ng an (em ) or syllable ; SYLLABIFICA TION (m ien )refers to the number of the syllables which compose a ver se
or a part of i t ; R H YM E (m ) is the correspondence of sound i n
the termi nating sounds of two or more members of a verse
and A CCENT (Elf?!I fi rm) marks the sections into which a vers e
i s divided.
685 . Quanti ty i s reckoned by métrés or moments,and
each short vowel i s supposed to be uttered in one moment, and
hence it i s equal to one métré . A long vowel takes twi ce as
much time as i s requi red to pronounce a Short vowel, and is ,
therefore, equal in quantity to two matrés . The di phthongs are
included in the long vowels .
T he length orquanti ty of thevowel i s indicated by two si gn s ,
the macron or a transverse line put on the top of a syllab le
to denote two métrés , and the crescent (v ) to denote one
mdtré thus if: 1 metre i r= 2 matras i rfi 3 matrés ;
W 4 metres j i ér 2 métrés .
686 . T here are some vowels which , though short, become
long by posi ti on . They are these —(l ) a short vowel wi th
an anuswér over i t; (2) a short vowel, followed by a visarga
(3 ) a Short vowel,followed by a double consonant; and (4 ) a short
vowel (occasionally) at the end of a verse. Thus i fgw; 3 1 ;
eastwri te afi tarare .
Neta — When the letter wi th an anuswar over i t, or that followed
by a double letter, is not p ronouneedf orcibly, i tdoes notbecome long ;as as ; ifs ; i n". écfl. 5am.
5 687 . R hyme forms an essential element of M arathi ver
sification, and the following verse i s an example of it
“ W m um m .
st ns vrm n srfi afi a error.
Note — The terminating syllables of all the four members of the
verse sound al i ke. T he terminating letters mustbe of the same organ.
§ 6 99] PR INC IPLES or VERS IPICA'rIoN . 3 6 3
688 . Syllabification is essential to some kinds of versifi
cati on,such as slokas, &c. In the following verse all the
members correspond in the number of thei r syllables, although
they do not all rhyme with each other
uh 5521 1 11 3! firm?In 5 5 syllables .
W TW ugzsrfswrm n 5 5
689 . A combination of the syllables, ei ther according to
their number, or their length (quanti ty ) forms a i n or foot.
When the syllables are combined according to their number,
they make what may be called a syllabic foot, and when they
are combined according to their length, they make a non
syllabi c foot .
690. A syllabic foot i s composed of three sun: or syl
lables, and the three syllables may or may not vary in length
thus mm i s a Syllabic foot.
Nole — The syllables composi ng a syllabic foot may be thus arranged
according to theirquantity
v W v ;m v G‘R‘
l‘ mam
Thus there are eightclasses of the syllabi c feet, each of which is named
by the i ni ti al letter of the above words . Thus n denotes the foot
m or v t denotes the foot tfi‘
qam v and so on .
5 691 . A non-syllabic foot, which i s measured by the length
of the syllables which compose i t, consi sts of four matrés, as
i f WT i i 4 .
N ote — T he non-svllabic feet are divided intofi ve classes, according
to the posi tion and quanti ty of the syllables of which they consi st.
Thus,i5 1 : 4 ; fifflfi r= 4 s i t if? “if
'
s'
r“if?f t
"
?= 4. The
classes are named by the ini tial letters of thesewords . T hus, I!denotes
h r 1?denotes firfifi i or v v and so on.
692,The feet make a cm or W a di st ich, and a verse
consists of two or more distichs . Thus
m fi fi é‘
rm l fi fi m sfi m fi u
Nole. — In thi s verse there are four distichs, and each di stich contains
3 64 VA R IET IES or vsnsrrrca'rum. 693
nine syllables, i .e. three syllabic feet, and fourteen matrss, i . e. th ree
and a half non-syllabic feet. The half-letters are not reckoned.
Nola n -Each distich is usually marked off by two p erp endicu lar
l ines, put at the end of i t. Thus 1
§ 693 . The distichs are arranged into lines called sni'
halves . Thus
“ W am ramm firw n
m m un flrm l ai m ftaw f‘fl ’
arn
694 . T he accent marks ed a section of the verse where
there i s a slight pausemade in read ing or singing . Thus
mm s! flai rnsta temgzw fiwmr n
W fimi 'r m afiafl llm u fi w m n
Nole.— T he accent falls here on every fi fth svllable.
83' Note.
— A di stich is a division of the verses according to the
sense as well as the arrangement of thefeet, whi le the accent does not
mark off clauses ; i t simply indicates theplace where a pause should
be made in reading . The syllable on which the accent falls ought to
fini sh the word .
JH A PTER XXXII .
TH E V A R IET IES or M A R A TH I VER SIFIC A T ION .
§ 695 706 .
695 . T he M arathi poetry i s divided into several classes ,
the principal of which are the fi ryés, the rSr
'
lolras, the Parlas,
the Sékis, the D indr’
s, the Ot is, and the A bhangs.
The flryé (strut).
696 . The A ryzi verse is wholly reckoned by the quanti fyof i ts syllables. It consi sts offear distichs and two li nes.
3 6 6 vnnmrms or VER SIFICA T ION . 700
the same syllable . The di stichs of a s'
loha may be composed o f
from one to any number of syllables, and may take any vari e tyof feet. T he following are a few specimens of Slokas
(1 )afa rimn l gzwfim u
W W II QEW’
I N
Note — The distichs are composed of five syllables each, an d
rhyme by pairs .
(h int ? i nmnmlwuwm sft ’w u
siazaw m ll tq rm i m n
Note — The distichs are composed of e ight syllables, and th e
accent falls upon every fourth syllable .
W i fiatfiw ll mgrfi s'
fem ram tzm‘i u
m w m afirefi um fi sfl fiww "
Note — The distichs are composed of eleven syllables each .
(4 )atwfi m am fi m nmmfi w am efi w a u
fi m am fi fi fi ufi fi wfit m fi fir fi n
Note — The distichs are composed of 1 3 syllables each and
the accent falls upon the thi rrl and the tenth syllables .
(5 )tra uma W m fi arm m q
’
rt ar‘
é u
W fi fi sfi atwfii éh a‘h fl a égrfi wfi u
m h wfi w m afi m m fi u
i m at mm afi m amm fl wfi
Note — Each di sti ch contai ns 23 syllables, and the accent
falls upon the 6 th, 6th, 6 th , and 5th syllables .
The Padas (W )
700. The Pada i s a stanza, composed of several lines,
called kadvens, the first line of which i s repeated at the end of
3 68 VA R IET IES or VER SIFICA T ION .
(I . ) A Dindi ; composed of two di stichs
m i rai m ew m fia W m m m uwm m m lm m m nqu
(IL ) A Dindi composed of four di stichs
w'
tgfl'
é mfi rlm ri lm é‘mufl m fi tfi mi u
m m fi aami m mmmflm afiwgmmn
The () rz'
aflfl
g 703 . Thi s verse i s determined nei ther by the quanti ty nor
the number of i ts syllables. It i s composed offour di sti chs the
first three of which rhyme wi th each other, whi le the last does
not. It does not di ffer much, in construction, from prose , and
i s employed in the composi tion of narrative poems . Thus
(1 )i tam h as ni t i n? fir st!m u
itm m llm m II M ukundaréya .
(2)a‘ras
'
im a'
rfi um awfi rafifi u
am in armfl’
rfi'
nést-at sl it Dnyéndeva .
(3 )
W E m insteam m manaffair]? m ll 3 G?!aa
“
unfi t II M ukteswar .
The A bhang (mitt)
704 . The A bhang verse has two or four di sti chs, and each
di stich contains a certain number of syllables . Sometimes two
short syllables are put for one long one .
705. When the A bhang verse consi sts of four di sti chs ,
the fi rst three have six syllables each, and the fourth has four.
Thus,
m ulti med iaafi é‘
rmfi nm mutt"3 41m "wfirth s isterum afianw ereas usm m‘tuauam mm ru«harm "33 m m"m fi ll i ll
Takhram.
Note .—The second and thi rd di stichs rhyme wi th each other.
3 70 PECULIA R POET ICA L roams. 7 1 1
m form fi m .— ll7aman .
fi m ( forM ) M W W fi
M ukteswar .
sum itm ifm form W .— Tuhérdm.
Sometimes an i s changed to Q‘
W W W fi .— Tnkérdm.
3 51 13 51?5?m,m fl' fi .
— Dnyénadev.
A rmorivss.
7 11 . The A djectives are sometimes put in the same case
wi th the noun which theyqualify
an am?at?a new arr-ti tm .— M or0pant.
7 12. A djectives ending in at are sometimes inflected li kethe adjectives in an
3 “ W W Ell “ afi W .— T ukdrdm.
7 13 . The adjectives are freely compared, as in Sanskri t,with the particles of comparison 520, Note)
m art fitfit fi r,were!m erm .— M oropant.
firgzw SW as M 3 , fi t! a?wi t earth— Moropant.
Puonouus.
7 1 4 . The personal pronouns assume various forms in
poetry
Nam. it Then Plural
A cc. qInstr. gar, at, at
But. 8m , qfil‘
, m , i a ,afi
A bl.
Gen “ m ; W w(Land tfl are used in the accusative m irth
-aftum .
7 15 . The demonstrati ve feminine pronouns (l and i ll ,and the relative i f, assume the forms 3 ,a, and 5!respectively ;and the crude-forms w andm , become W and m .
7 17] PECULIAR POETIOA I. roams . 3 71
m it i fm , i t itm uttm .— Rémdas
m m m as?sw ,m w em .— Tukerem.
R’
Wfl rfisfi fi v fi . fl atfi art m n fi — Waman
7 16 . The forms am , m ,m , and W are Optionallychanged toi at, slur, hmand $ 3 7 . i f!who, is changed to as" .
W ‘Qfi W W ” ,m REEL— Wanna?»
The crude-form m of 551 1 what ? is changed to m .
m ,m,awmfitm ,wri tgmamM m .— Tekerem
The word {at occurs in the formsqt and Q'
s:
{It‘llW W W ,3R 6 G13 ?m
'
tali'
.— Tnkeirdm.
in: same w t , anwas, i f. mm .— Mukmwar .
Nata — Sometimes pure Sanskri t forms are used for in
stance, an for armmine, a“
! form thine.
Tan Vane.
71 7 . The past habitual forms are usually employed for
all the forms of conjugation, present, past, and futurel st Conjugation . 2nd Conjugati on .
fi sing .W ai plu. i t 5 1 3 , “ Ti ff i ts:
2. i m w a“ i m :w m3 . i nfinite? a,m , 1fi ,m an imal “ ,
i s W i ll?mImperative.
i aifi:
Pluper/ect Participle.
«i n , «as, «gmeg or aamtm , m ,mNata — The gerund is usually employed for the imperative
or the subjunctivearm arafi W mbrat (rari ty— Tulaérém.
Note. — Sometimes the second si ngular and third indicative
plural forms assume R!and fi'
reapectively m ,m .
Note — Sometimes the root i s put for the third person sin
gular
m i f 3 3 (at) fli t — Tukdra’
m .
Note — In the past second person plural Elli and"it?! are
sometimes substituted for at
3 72 racemes POETICA L roams . 7 18
m mm mw afi m m fi
Note. Some verbs assume peculiar forms in the past ten se
emi t for await (Sk . mm, are) went
m for m laughed.
-The future terminations i n Q’
andf are indi scriminately
$ 31 trifle; (for (M a) fi rm— Ehnath.
'{fi W W ‘flW w .— Sridhar.
Note — A s the base of the second conjugation i s made up
wi th i‘
, so in poetry the base of the first conjugation i s form ed
71 8 . Passive forms made up wi th { i t or fi (Sk . at) a re
used often in poetry, both actively and passively . They a re
thus conjugatedPR ESENT TENSE .
Kartari Constructi on.
S i ngular . P lural .
‘fi' m for
-ii2. i mffi fi
‘m ”e mf-d is W fi ffi fi l
fir, é‘
r, 6 arm-i s?m.,-eff f .
, n. th anat Esta-em
Bhave Construction .
PA ST T ense .
Karmani Construction.
arr suit affi rm—enema
1 . rat'
s. Fi fi . aafi fatal sat-FF?
A PPENDIX . 3 75
Nora B .
Parsi ng.
(l ) an d i'
fl l‘
fi ll Ravj i comes every day.
twflfl' is a porper noun of the l st declension, (but declined
irregularly,) 3 rd s ingular masculine, and in the nominative
case, being nominative to an] .
ih r i s an adverb modifying fl .
i i i 18 an irregular intransitive verb of the 1815 conjugation,
present indicative, the 3rd singular masculine, and being in
agreemoutwith thenominati ve, is in the subjective construction.
(2) m afi you should come.
an i s a personal pronoun,2nd singular, and in the instru
mental case of agency, being nominative tomi .
qfi‘i s an irregular intransitive verb of the l at conjugation,present subjective, the 3 rd singular neuter, and i s in the neuter
construction, as it does not agree with its nominative W
(3 ) tri mm m Raghobareads a book .
trim? is a proper noun of the l st declension, (but declined
i rregularly, ) 3 td singular masculine, and in the nominative
case, being nominative tom .
m i s a common noun of the 2nd declension, 3 rd singular
neuter, and in the accusative case, governed bym .
m is a regular transi tive verb of the 2nd conjugation, 3 rd
singular masculine, present indicative, and, being in agreement
with i tsnominativem i s in the subjective construction.
(4 ) flfi swimwhen she cut the mango .
a} i s a personal pronoun, 3rd singular feminine, and is i n
the intrumental case of agency, being nominative toW
3 76 A PPENDIX .
swim i s a common noun of the l st declension, the 3 rd sing u lar
masculine, and is in the accusative case, governed by mfi'
a'
r.
m is a regular transi tive verb of the 2nd conjugation, 3 rdsingular masculine, of the past indicative, and
,agreeing w i th
i ts object, is i n the objective construction.
(5) m m mi: as:do not beat that chi ld.
an is a demonstrative pronoun in the crude form, joined to
m i s a common noun of the 3rd declension (but irreg ularly declined) , the 3 rd singular masculine , and i s in the dat i ve
case, being the direct object to art aah.
qr'
c azfi is a regular transitive verb of the negative form, zud
singular of the present imperative, and, agreeing wi th the
nominative i thou understood, i s in the subjective constructi on .
(6) W Wfi fi W Yamani unloosed me.
war is a personal pronoun, 1st singular masculine, and is i n
the dative case, being direct object tom .
zm'
eflfi'
i s a proper noun of the l st declension,of the 3 td
singular feminine, of the instrumental case of agency, and i s
nominative toW .
W i s a regular transitive verb of the 2nd conjugation, thepast indicative, 3 rd singular, and being in the neuter construc
tion, i s of the neuter gender, and does not agree either W ith the
subject or the object.
(7 ) i ll WW {PEN fir i t? he wi ll arise as soon as she calls
out to him .
“
(fl i s apersonal pronoun, being nominative absolute by reason
of the following participlem .
m i s a. personal pronoun, and i s in the dative case, beingobject to elmqu i ll“ .
ch“
tart-ti i s the present participle of the compoundverb t imm ,
being joined to if}.
NOTICES OF THE GRAMMAR .
Op in i ons on the Fi rst Ed i ti on .
Of all the Sanskri tic languages of H industan . M arathi IS the most di ffi cult
on account of the vari ety of i ts grammati cal forms, i ts i diomatic phraseology .
and the ri chness of i ts vocabulary . We should , therefore, naturally expect a
grammari an to have endeavoured to simpli fy as much as possible the intro duc
t ion to the grammar of that lang uage . and to present to the student only i ts
most es sential and characteri sti c features . In th is respect we have always con
s idere d Stevenson’
s Grammar . which has for many years been the principal
gu ide to M arathi , as a signal fai lure. and we should only account for the fact
of i ts havi ng gone through four e di tions from the analogy of the Eton Latin
Grammar, and simi lar mediaeval insti tuti ons . wh ich have sturdily kept their
ground in the face of infini te ly superior works by M advig and others A far
more ambi tious grammar than the elementary book just noticed [M n Bellairs’
Grammar
}has, simultaneously wi th i t. appeared at Bombay, under the ti tle
The Stu( ent’
s M anual of M arathi Grammar.
’Characteri sed by the same
lucidi ty as the former, but arrange don a more comprehensive plan,i t shows on
every page that i ts anonymous author has sought to apply in i t the metho d
followed in the most recent investi gations on Comparati ve Grammar. Though
i ntended for practical purposes only, i t i s calculate dto prove of great service
also to the scientific inqui rer into the character of the language of which i t
treats.
” Tr i'
i bfner’s Li terary R ecord.
We have much pleasure in directing the attention of students of M arathito a new grammar of the language, publishe dby a Native scholar. It suppl ies
a desideratum long felt by European students of M arathi , who have hi therto hadno other book for thei r gu idance than the work of Dr. Stevenson . The M anual
has h igher claims than that of being an elementary treatise on M arathi Grammar.
I t is the most scienti fic and cri tical grammar of an Indian vernacular we
have seen, and throws much light on the orig in of the vocables, inflections, and
various other points relati ng to the structure of M arathi and other cog nate
languages. The book i s mainly deS i gne dfor those prepai i ng for M atriculati on ,
for whom i t appears to be well-sui te d. — The T imes of I nd ia .
Upon the whole we think the M anual i s well-fi tted for intro ducti on as a
text-book into the H igh Schools.— T he B ombay Educational R ecord.
I repeat that I think it is credi table to the author. and I have no doubt
that i t W i ll be found useful both to advanced Native students and to European
students of M arat — M aj or T homas Candy, Marathi Translator to the
Gorernnwnt Educati onal Department.
I am glad to find that M r. Navalkar i s about to publish a revised and
improved e dition of h is excellent M arathi Grammar, which has already found
much acceptance in Western India and elsewhere. I have no doubt that the
new ed i tion of his work wi ll prove a valuable acquisition both to those com
mencing the study of M arathi , and to those who already make free use of that
language. The junction of both parts of the work in one volume is a con
veni ent arrangement.— R ec. Dr. Wi lson, DJ ) .
